<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
		<id>https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Ian</id>
		<title>PocketWizard Wiki - User contributions [en]</title>
		<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Ian"/>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=Special:Contributions/Ian"/>
		<updated>2026-05-07T03:25:28Z</updated>
		<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
		<generator>MediaWiki 1.24.4</generator>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=Getting_Started&amp;diff=3204</id>
		<title>Getting Started</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=Getting_Started&amp;diff=3204"/>
				<updated>2014-09-02T15:54:54Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ian: /* 2. Check for Updates */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
====1. Download the PocketWizard Utility====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:50%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Windows'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-collapsible-content&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Download the [http://utility.lpadesign.com/utility/PocketWizard%20Utility%20Setup.exe PocketWizard Utility Version 1.58 Installer for Windows]&lt;br /&gt;
# Save the installer to the directory of your choice (usually the Downloads folder)&lt;br /&gt;
# Run the Installer and follow the installation instructions&lt;br /&gt;
# The PocketWizard Utility is now installed in your Start Menu&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:50%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Mac'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-collapsible-content&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Download the appropriate PocketWizard Utility for your Mac:&lt;br /&gt;
#* [http://utility.lpadesign.com/utility/PocketWizard%20Utility%201.58.dmg PocketWizard Utility Version 1.58 for Intel Mac]&lt;br /&gt;
#* [http://utility.lpadesign.com/utility/PocketWizard%20Utility%201.54.dmg  PocketWizard Utility Version 1.54 for PowerPC Mac]&lt;br /&gt;
# Save the Disk Image file (.dmg) to the directory of your choice (usually the Downloads folder)&lt;br /&gt;
# Open the downloaded .dmg file&lt;br /&gt;
# Run the PocketWizard installer package within the Disk Image, and follow the installation prompts&lt;br /&gt;
# The PocketWizard Utility is now installed in your Applications folder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====2. Check for Updates====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:50%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''MiniTT1, FlexTT5, PowerST4, and PowerMC2'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-collapsible-content&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Launch the PocketWizard Utility&lt;br /&gt;
# Connect your radio to your computer via a Mini-B USB cable&lt;br /&gt;
# The connected radio will be displayed in the top left of the Utility window.&lt;br /&gt;
# Note the current Firmware Version of the connected radio. If the Firmware Version matches the Current Versions listed below, skip steps 5 to 9 and proceed to the next radio.&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the Update Tab, click &amp;quot;Check for Updates&amp;quot;, which will download the latest firmware version, and prompt to update the firmware in the connected radio.&lt;br /&gt;
# The Utility will update the firmware in the connected radio. Do not disconnect the radio while the progress bars are visible.&lt;br /&gt;
# After the Utility confirms a successful firmware update, disconnect the radio from your computer.&lt;br /&gt;
# Perform a Factory Reset of your radio, by holding TEST as you power on the radio for 10 seconds, until you see 4 green blinks in a row. [http://www.pocketwizard.com/inspirations/tutorials/reset_mode/ Click here to view a video of this reset process]&lt;br /&gt;
# Repeat the above steps for all of your radios, making sure all firmware versions match the Current Versions listed below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:50%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Plus III'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-collapsible-content&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Launch the PocketWizard Utility&lt;br /&gt;
# Connect your radio to your computer via a Mini-B USB cable&lt;br /&gt;
# The connected radio will be displayed in the top left of the Utility window.&lt;br /&gt;
# Note the current Firmware Version of the connected radio. If the Firmware Version matches the Current Versions listed below, skip steps X to X and proceed to the next radio.&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the Update Tab, click Check for Updates, which will download the latest firmware version, and prompt to update the firmware in the connected radio.&lt;br /&gt;
# The Utility will update the firmware in the connected radio. Do not disconnect the radio while the progress bars are visible.&lt;br /&gt;
# After the Utility confirms a successful firmware update, disconnect the radio from your computer, and move the power switch off.&lt;br /&gt;
# Perform a Factory Reset of your radio, by holding the TEST button as you power on the radio.&lt;br /&gt;
# Repeat the above steps for all of your radios, making sure all firmware versions match the Current Versions listed below.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:50%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''MultiMAX'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-collapsible-content&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Launch the PocketWizard Utility&lt;br /&gt;
# Enable USB Mode on the MultiMAX:&lt;br /&gt;
#* Turn off the MultiMAX&lt;br /&gt;
#* Hold the Backlight button (between TEST and MENU), and connect the Mini-B USB cable to your computer&lt;br /&gt;
#* Continue to hold the Backlight button, and move the power switch to Transmit&lt;br /&gt;
#* Release the Backlight button&lt;br /&gt;
# The connected radio will be displayed in the top left of the Utility window.&lt;br /&gt;
# Note the current Firmware Version of the connected radio. If the Firmware Version matches the Current Versions listed below, skip steps X to X and proceed to the next radio.&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the Update Tab, click Check for Updates, which will download the latest firmware version, and prompt to update the firmware in the connected radio.&lt;br /&gt;
# The Utility will update the firmware in the connected radio. Do not disconnect the radio while the progress bars are visible.&lt;br /&gt;
# After the Utility confirms a successful firmware update, disconnect the radio from your computer, and move the power switch off.&lt;br /&gt;
# Perform a Factory Reset of your radio, by holding the C key as you power on the radio.&lt;br /&gt;
# Repeat the above steps for all of your radios, making sure all firmware versions match the Current Versions listed below.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=====Current Firmware Versions=====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;text-align: center;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!''Radio''&lt;br /&gt;
!''Firmware Version''&lt;br /&gt;
!''Release Date''&lt;br /&gt;
!''Release Notes''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;text-align: left;&amp;quot;|MiniTT1 / FlexTT5 Canon&lt;br /&gt;
|6.700&lt;br /&gt;
|2014-08-05&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://www.pocketwizard.com/upload/photos/322MiniTT1FlexTT5_Canon_6_700_Firmware_Release_Notes.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;text-align: left;&amp;quot;|MiniTT1 / FlexTT5 Nikon&lt;br /&gt;
|3.700&lt;br /&gt;
|2014-08-05&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://www.pocketwizard.com/upload/photos/322MiniTT1FlexTT5_Nikon_3.700_Firmware_Release_Notes.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;text-align: left;&amp;quot;|PowerMC2&lt;br /&gt;
|2.400&lt;br /&gt;
|2013-06-11&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://www.pocketwizard.com/upload/photos/322PowerMC2_Firmware_ReleaseNotes_2.400.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;text-align: left;&amp;quot;|PowerST4&lt;br /&gt;
|5.400&lt;br /&gt;
|2013-06-11&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://www.pocketwizard.com/upload/photos/322ST4_Firmware_Release_Notes_5.400.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;text-align: left;&amp;quot;|Plus III&lt;br /&gt;
|1.200&lt;br /&gt;
|2013-06-11&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://www.pocketwizard.com/upload/photos/322Plus_III_Firmware_Release_Notes_1.200.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;text-align: left;&amp;quot;|MultiMAX&lt;br /&gt;
|7.53&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot;|[http://www.pocketwizard.com/upload/photos/733MM3_Eng_Man_LPF100v1.5_plus_Add_7.5v1.1_7.51RN_2.pdf See Manual]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
When available, information about Beta firmware is [http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=Beta_Firmware available here]. ''There are currently no beta firmware releases.''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====3. First Time Setup====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:50%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''MiniTT1 &amp;amp; FlexTT5 - Canon'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-collapsible-content&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# For the radio that will be used as the transmitter attached to your camera, change the Camera Model setting to match the camera the radio will be attached to for Configuration C1. This setting is located under the Misc tab when your radio is connected to the PocketWizard Utility. Make sure to Apply Changes in the bottom left of the Utility window after applying this setting. Once the radio has briefly disappeared and reappeared in the Utility window (which confirms the settings have been applied to the radio), you can disconnect the USB cable. [[File:Misc.jpg|500px|center|Misc Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
# Connect your receiving flashes to their respective FlexTT5's. Turn the flash on, and set it to the normal ETTL mode - NOT &amp;quot;Master&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Slave&amp;quot; mode. Then, turn the FlexTT5 on to Configuration C1. Within a few seconds, a low power flash will be emitted from the directly-connected flash, confirming the flash and FlexTT5 are communicating through the hotshoe properly.&lt;br /&gt;
# Connect the transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 to your camera. Turn the radio on to Configuration C1.&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn on the camera, and set to 1/160th shutter speed. Take a test shot with the camera at this shutter speed - the remote flash will not fire (this is a Calibration Shot for the radio). Take a second test shot, and your remote flashes will fire a TTL exposure!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Step 1 is only required once, or when the camera model changes. The normal power-up sequence is Steps 2-4.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These steps are for basic TTL operation.&lt;br /&gt;
Using an AC3? [http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=Ac3 Continue Here]&lt;br /&gt;
Using a Master Canon flash? [http://www.pocketwizard.com/inspirations/tutorials/ratios_flashoncamera/ Continue Here]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:50%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''MiniTT1 &amp;amp; FlexTT5 - Nikon'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-collapsible-content&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Set your camera to use Auto-FP. On most Nikon Cameras, this is Custom Function e1, located under the Pencil menu. This setting should be set to the slowest shutter speed with the &amp;quot;(Auto FP)&amp;quot; option. Most Nikon cameras will use &amp;quot;1/250 (Auto FP)&amp;quot;, although some will be 1/200 (Auto FP)&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Connect your receiving flashes to their respective FlexTT5's. Turn the flash on, and set it to the normal TTL mode - NOT &amp;quot;Master&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Slave&amp;quot; mode. Then, turn the FlexTT5 on to Configuration C1. Within a few seconds, a low power flash will be emitted from the directly-connected flash, confirming the flash and FlexTT5 are communicating through the hotshoe properly.&lt;br /&gt;
# Connect the transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 to your camera. Turn the radio on to Configuration C1.&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn on the camera, and set to 1/160th shutter speed. Take a test shot with the camera at this shutter speed - the remote flash will fire, but may not sync properly (this is a Calibration Shot for the radio). Take a second test shot, and your remote flashes will fire a TTL exposure!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Step 1 is only required once, or when you set up a new camera. The normal power-up sequence is Steps 2-4.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These steps are for basic TTL operation.&lt;br /&gt;
Using an AC3? [http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=Ac3 Continue Here]&lt;br /&gt;
Using a Master Nikon flash? [http://www.pocketwizard.com/inspirations/tutorials/sb900/ Continue Here]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:50%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''PowerST4'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-collapsible-content&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Connect your PowerST4 to your remote Elinchrom Flash, and power on the flash unit. The radio will power on when the flash is turned on.&lt;br /&gt;
# Follow the above instructions for starting up a Canon or Nikon transmitting radio.&lt;br /&gt;
# You will now be triggering your PowerST4! Use the in-camera Flash Exposure Compensation settings to adjust the power levels.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also use your AC3 or Canon / Nikon master flash controls to adjust the manual power level of the connected flash. See the respective links above.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:50%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''PowerMC2'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-collapsible-content&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Connect your PowerMC2 to your remote Einstein flash, and power on the flash unit. The radio will power on when the flash is turned on.&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the Einstein's LCD to change the Channel and Zone settings to channel: &amp;quot;CTL-01&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Zone A&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Follow the above instructions for starting up a Canon or Nikon transmitting radio.&lt;br /&gt;
# You will now be triggering your PowerMC2! Use the in-camera Flash Exposure Compensation settings to adjust the power levels.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also use your AC3 or Canon / Nikon master flash controls to adjust the manual power level of the connected flash. See the respective links above.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:50%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Plus III &amp;amp; MultiMAX'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-collapsible-content&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# With all equipment powered off, connect your remote radio to the camera or flash you'd like to trigger (with appropriate [http://www.pocketwizard.com/products/cable_accessory/ cable])&lt;br /&gt;
# Connect your transmitting radio to the hotshoe of your camera (or for a remote camera, simply have the radio in your hand)&lt;br /&gt;
# Power on the remote radio, the remote flash, and the transmitting radio.&lt;br /&gt;
# Ensure the Plus III's are set to TxRx mode, or for a MultiMAX that the transmitting radio is set to Transmit, and the receiver to Receive mode.&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the Channels and Zones to match.&lt;br /&gt;
# Take a test shot, or press the TEST button, and the remote unit will fire!&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====4. Further Reading====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For more information about specific topics, continue reading here:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Channels]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:[[HyperSync]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And for more radio-specific information, start here:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Plus III FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:[[PlusX FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:[[MultiMAX FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:[[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:[[PowerMC2 FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:[[PowerST4 FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:[[PocketWizard Utility FAQ]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ian</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=Getting_Started&amp;diff=3199</id>
		<title>Getting Started</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=Getting_Started&amp;diff=3199"/>
				<updated>2014-08-20T17:16:39Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ian: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
====1. Download the PocketWizard Utility====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:50%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Windows'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-collapsible-content&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Download the [http://utility.lpadesign.com/utility/PocketWizard%20Utility%20Setup.exe PocketWizard Utility Version 1.58 Installer for Windows]&lt;br /&gt;
# Save the installer to the directory of your choice (usually the Downloads folder)&lt;br /&gt;
# Run the Installer and follow the installation instructions&lt;br /&gt;
# The PocketWizard Utility is now installed in your Start Menu&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:50%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Mac'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-collapsible-content&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Download the appropriate PocketWizard Utility for your Mac:&lt;br /&gt;
#* [http://utility.lpadesign.com/utility/PocketWizard%20Utility%201.58.dmg PocketWizard Utility Version 1.58 for Intel Mac]&lt;br /&gt;
#* [http://utility.lpadesign.com/utility/PocketWizard%20Utility%201.54.dmg  PocketWizard Utility Version 1.54 for PowerPC Mac]&lt;br /&gt;
# Save the Disk Image file (.dmg) to the directory of your choice (usually the Downloads folder)&lt;br /&gt;
# Open the downloaded .dmg file&lt;br /&gt;
# Run the PocketWizard installer package within the Disk Image, and follow the installation prompts&lt;br /&gt;
# The PocketWizard Utility is now installed in your Applications folder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====2. Check for Updates====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:50%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''MiniTT1, FlexTT5, PowerST4, and PowerMC2'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-collapsible-content&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Launch the PocketWizard Utility&lt;br /&gt;
# Connect your radio to your computer via a Mini-B USB cable&lt;br /&gt;
# The connected radio will be displayed in the top left of the Utility window.&lt;br /&gt;
# Note the current Firmware Version of the connected radio. If the Firmware Version matches the Current Versions listed below, skip steps X to X and proceed to the next radio.&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the Update Tab, click Check for Updates, which will download the latest firmware version, and prompt to update the firmware in the connected radio.&lt;br /&gt;
# The utility will update the firmware in the connected radio. Do not disconnect the radio while the progress bars are visible.&lt;br /&gt;
# After the utility confirms a successful firmware update, disconnect the radio from your computer.&lt;br /&gt;
# Perform a Factory Reset of your radio, by holding TEST as you power on the radio for 10 seconds, until you see 4 green blinks in a row. [http://www.pocketwizard.com/inspirations/tutorials/reset_mode/ Click here to view a video of this reset process]&lt;br /&gt;
# Repeat the above steps for all of your radios, making sure all firmware versions match the Current Versions listed below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:50%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Plus III'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-collapsible-content&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Launch the PocketWizard Utility&lt;br /&gt;
# Connect your radio to your computer via a Mini-B USB cable&lt;br /&gt;
# The connected radio will be displayed in the top left of the Utility window.&lt;br /&gt;
# Note the current Firmware Version of the connected radio. If the Firmware Version matches the Current Versions listed below, skip steps X to X and proceed to the next radio.&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the Update Tab, click Check for Updates, which will download the latest firmware version, and prompt to update the firmware in the connected radio.&lt;br /&gt;
# The utility will update the firmware in the connected radio. Do not disconnect the radio while the progress bars are visible.&lt;br /&gt;
# After the utility confirms a successful firmware update, disconnect the radio from your computer, and move the power switch off.&lt;br /&gt;
# Perform a Factory Reset of your radio, by holding the TEST button as you power on the radio.&lt;br /&gt;
# Repeat the above steps for all of your radios, making sure all firmware versions match the Current Versions listed below.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:50%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''MultiMAX'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-collapsible-content&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Launch the PocketWizard Utility&lt;br /&gt;
# Enable USB Mode on the MultiMAX:&lt;br /&gt;
#* Turn off the MultiMAX&lt;br /&gt;
#* Hold the Backlight button (between TEST and MENU), and connect the Mini-B USB cable to your computer&lt;br /&gt;
#* Continue to hold the Backlight button, and move the power switch to Transmit&lt;br /&gt;
#* Release the Backlight button&lt;br /&gt;
# The connected radio will be displayed in the top left of the Utility window.&lt;br /&gt;
# Note the current Firmware Version of the connected radio. If the Firmware Version matches the Current Versions listed below, skip steps X to X and proceed to the next radio.&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the Update Tab, click Check for Updates, which will download the latest firmware version, and prompt to update the firmware in the connected radio.&lt;br /&gt;
# The utility will update the firmware in the connected radio. Do not disconnect the radio while the progress bars are visible.&lt;br /&gt;
# After the utility confirms a successful firmware update, disconnect the radio from your computer, and move the power switch off.&lt;br /&gt;
# Perform a Factory Reset of your radio, by holding the C key as you power on the radio.&lt;br /&gt;
# Repeat the above steps for all of your radios, making sure all firmware versions match the Current Versions listed below.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=====Current Firmware Versions=====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;text-align: center;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!''Radio''&lt;br /&gt;
!''Firmware Version''&lt;br /&gt;
!''Release Date''&lt;br /&gt;
!''Release Notes''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;text-align: left;&amp;quot;|MiniTT1 / FlexTT5 Canon&lt;br /&gt;
|6.700&lt;br /&gt;
|2014-08-05&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://www.pocketwizard.com/upload/photos/322MiniTT1FlexTT5_Canon_6_700_Firmware_Release_Notes.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;text-align: left;&amp;quot;|MiniTT1 / FlexTT5 Nikon&lt;br /&gt;
|3.700&lt;br /&gt;
|2014-08-05&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://www.pocketwizard.com/upload/photos/322MiniTT1FlexTT5_Nikon_3.700_Firmware_Release_Notes.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;text-align: left;&amp;quot;|PowerMC2&lt;br /&gt;
|2.400&lt;br /&gt;
|2013-06-11&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://www.pocketwizard.com/upload/photos/322PowerMC2_Firmware_ReleaseNotes_2.400.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;text-align: left;&amp;quot;|PowerST4&lt;br /&gt;
|5.400&lt;br /&gt;
|2013-06-11&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://www.pocketwizard.com/upload/photos/322ST4_Firmware_Release_Notes_5.400.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;text-align: left;&amp;quot;|Plus III&lt;br /&gt;
|1.200&lt;br /&gt;
|2013-06-11&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://www.pocketwizard.com/upload/photos/322Plus_III_Firmware_Release_Notes_1.200.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;text-align: left;&amp;quot;|MultiMAX&lt;br /&gt;
|7.53&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot;|[http://www.pocketwizard.com/upload/photos/733MM3_Eng_Man_LPF100v1.5_plus_Add_7.5v1.1_7.51RN_2.pdf See Manual]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
When available, information about Beta firmware is [http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=Beta_Firmware available here]. ''There are currently no beta firmware releases.''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====3. First Time Setup====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:50%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''MiniTT1 &amp;amp; FlexTT5 - Canon'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-collapsible-content&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# For the radio that will be used as the transmitter attached to your camera, change the Camera Model setting to match the camera the radio will be attached to for Configuration C1. This setting is located under the Misc tab when your radio is connected to the PocketWizard Utility. Make sure to Apply Changes in the bottom left of the Utility window after applying this setting. Once the radio has briefly disappeared and reappeared in the Utility window (which confirms the settings have been applied to the radio), you can disconnect the USB cable. [[File:Misc.jpg|500px|center|Misc Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
# Connect your receiving flashes to their respective FlexTT5's. Turn the flash on, and set it to the normal ETTL mode - NOT &amp;quot;Master&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Slave&amp;quot; mode. Then, turn the FlexTT5 on to Configuration C1. Within a few seconds, a low power flash will be emitted from the directly-connected flash, confirming the flash and FlexTT5 are communicating through the hotshoe properly.&lt;br /&gt;
# Connect the transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 to your camera. Turn the radio on to Configuration C1.&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn on the camera, and set to 1/160th shutter speed. Take a test shot with the camera at this shutter speed - the remote flash will not fire (this is a Calibration Shot for the radio). Take a second test shot, and your remote flashes will fire a TTL exposure!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Step 1 is only required once, or when the camera model changes. The normal power-up sequence is Steps 2-4.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These steps are for basic TTL operation.&lt;br /&gt;
Using an AC3? [http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=Ac3 Continue Here]&lt;br /&gt;
Using a Master Canon flash? [http://www.pocketwizard.com/inspirations/tutorials/ratios_flashoncamera/ Continue Here]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:50%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''MiniTT1 &amp;amp; FlexTT5 - Nikon'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-collapsible-content&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Set your camera to use Auto-FP. On most Nikon Cameras, this is Custom Function e1, located under the Pencil menu. This setting should be set to the slowest shutter speed with the &amp;quot;(Auto FP)&amp;quot; option. Most Nikon cameras will use &amp;quot;1/250 (Auto FP)&amp;quot;, although some will be 1/200 (Auto FP)&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Connect your receiving flashes to their respective FlexTT5's. Turn the flash on, and set it to the normal TTL mode - NOT &amp;quot;Master&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Slave&amp;quot; mode. Then, turn the FlexTT5 on to Configuration C1. Within a few seconds, a low power flash will be emitted from the directly-connected flash, confirming the flash and FlexTT5 are communicating through the hotshoe properly.&lt;br /&gt;
# Connect the transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 to your camera. Turn the radio on to Configuration C1.&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn on the camera, and set to 1/160th shutter speed. Take a test shot with the camera at this shutter speed - the remote flash will fire, but may not sync properly (this is a Calibration Shot for the radio). Take a second test shot, and your remote flashes will fire a TTL exposure!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Step 1 is only required once, or when you set up a new camera. The normal power-up sequence is Steps 2-4.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These steps are for basic TTL operation.&lt;br /&gt;
Using an AC3? [http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=Ac3 Continue Here]&lt;br /&gt;
Using a Master Nikon flash? [http://www.pocketwizard.com/inspirations/tutorials/sb900/ Continue Here]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:50%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''PowerST4'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-collapsible-content&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Connect your PowerST4 to your remote Elinchrom Flash, and power on the flash unit. The radio will power on when the flash is turned on.&lt;br /&gt;
# Follow the above instructions for starting up a Canon or Nikon transmitting radio.&lt;br /&gt;
# You will now be triggering your PowerST4! Use the in-camera Flash Exposure Compensation settings to adjust the power levels.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also use your AC3 or Canon / Nikon master flash controls to adjust the manual power level of the connected flash. See the respective links above.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:50%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''PowerMC2'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-collapsible-content&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Connect your PowerMC2 to your remote Einstein flash, and power on the flash unit. The radio will power on when the flash is turned on.&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the Einstein's LCD to change the Channel and Zone settings to channel: &amp;quot;CTL-01&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Zone A&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Follow the above instructions for starting up a Canon or Nikon transmitting radio.&lt;br /&gt;
# You will now be triggering your PowerMC2! Use the in-camera Flash Exposure Compensation settings to adjust the power levels.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also use your AC3 or Canon / Nikon master flash controls to adjust the manual power level of the connected flash. See the respective links above.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:50%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Plus III &amp;amp; MultiMAX'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-collapsible-content&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# With all equipment powered off, connect your remote radio to the camera or flash you'd like to trigger (with appropriate [http://www.pocketwizard.com/products/cable_accessory/ cable])&lt;br /&gt;
# Connect your transmitting radio to the hotshoe of your camera (or for a remote camera, simply have the radio in your hand)&lt;br /&gt;
# Power on the remote radio, the remote flash, and the transmitting radio.&lt;br /&gt;
# Ensure the Plus III's are set to TxRx mode, or for a MultiMAX that the transmitting radio is set to Transmit, and the receiver to Receive mode.&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the Channels and Zones to match.&lt;br /&gt;
# Take a test shot, or press the TEST button, and the remote unit will fire!&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====4. Further Reading====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For more information about specific topics, continue reading here:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Channels]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:[[HyperSync]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And for more radio-specific information, start here:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Plus III FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:[[PlusX FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:[[MultiMAX FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:[[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:[[PowerMC2 FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:[[PowerST4 FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:[[PocketWizard Utility FAQ]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ian</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=Getting_Started&amp;diff=3198</id>
		<title>Getting Started</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=Getting_Started&amp;diff=3198"/>
				<updated>2014-08-20T16:33:26Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ian: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
====1. Download the PocketWizard Utility====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:50%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Windows'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-collapsible-content&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Download the [http://utility.lpadesign.com/utility/PocketWizard%20Utility%20Setup.exe PocketWizard Utility Version 1.58 Installer for Windows]&lt;br /&gt;
# Save the installer to the directory of your choice (usually the Downloads folder)&lt;br /&gt;
# Run the Installer and follow the installation instructions&lt;br /&gt;
# The PocketWizard Utility is now installed in your Start Menu&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:50%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Mac'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-collapsible-content&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Download the appropriate PocketWizard Utility for your Mac:&lt;br /&gt;
#* [http://utility.lpadesign.com/utility/PocketWizard%20Utility%201.58.dmg PocketWizard Utility Version 1.58 for Intel Mac]&lt;br /&gt;
#* [http://utility.lpadesign.com/utility/PocketWizard%20Utility%201.54.dmg  PocketWizard Utility Version 1.54 for PowerPC Mac]&lt;br /&gt;
# Save the Disk Image file (.dmg) to the directory of your choice (usually the Downloads folder)&lt;br /&gt;
# Open the downloaded .dmg file&lt;br /&gt;
# Run the PocketWizard installer package within the Disk Image, and follow the installation prompts&lt;br /&gt;
# The PocketWizard Utility is now installed in your Applications folder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====2. Check for Updates====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:50%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''MiniTT1, FlexTT5, PowerST4, and PowerMC2'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-collapsible-content&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Launch the PocketWizard Utility&lt;br /&gt;
# Connect your radio to your computer via a Mini-B USB cable&lt;br /&gt;
# The connected radio will be displayed in the top left of the Utility window.&lt;br /&gt;
# Note the current Firmware Version of the connected radio. If the Firmware Version matches the Current Versions listed below, skip steps X to X and proceed to the next radio.&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the Update Tab, click Check for Updates, which will download the latest firmware version, and prompt to update the firmware in the connected radio.&lt;br /&gt;
# The utility will update the firmware in the connected radio. Do not disconnect the radio while the progress bars are visible.&lt;br /&gt;
# After the utility confirms a successful firmware update, disconnect the radio from your computer.&lt;br /&gt;
# Perform a Factory Reset of your radio, by holding TEST as you power on the radio for 10 seconds, until you see 4 green blinks in a row. [http://www.pocketwizard.com/inspirations/tutorials/reset_mode/ Click here to view a video of this reset process]&lt;br /&gt;
# Repeat the above steps for all of your radios, making sure all firmware versions match the Current Versions listed below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:50%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Plus III'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-collapsible-content&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Launch the PocketWizard Utility&lt;br /&gt;
# Connect your radio to your computer via a Mini-B USB cable&lt;br /&gt;
# The connected radio will be displayed in the top left of the Utility window.&lt;br /&gt;
# Note the current Firmware Version of the connected radio. If the Firmware Version matches the Current Versions listed below, skip steps X to X and proceed to the next radio.&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the Update Tab, click Check for Updates, which will download the latest firmware version, and prompt to update the firmware in the connected radio.&lt;br /&gt;
# The utility will update the firmware in the connected radio. Do not disconnect the radio while the progress bars are visible.&lt;br /&gt;
# After the utility confirms a successful firmware update, disconnect the radio from your computer, and move the power switch off.&lt;br /&gt;
# Perform a Factory Reset of your radio, by holding the TEST button as you power on the radio.&lt;br /&gt;
# Repeat the above steps for all of your radios, making sure all firmware versions match the Current Versions listed below.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:50%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''MultiMAX'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-collapsible-content&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Launch the PocketWizard Utility&lt;br /&gt;
# Enable USB Mode on the MultiMAX:&lt;br /&gt;
#* Turn off the MultiMAX&lt;br /&gt;
#* Hold the Backlight button (between TEST and MENU), and connect the Mini-B USB cable to your computer&lt;br /&gt;
#* Continue to hold the Backlight button, and move the power switch to Transmit&lt;br /&gt;
#* Release the Backlight button&lt;br /&gt;
# The connected radio will be displayed in the top left of the Utility window.&lt;br /&gt;
# Note the current Firmware Version of the connected radio. If the Firmware Version matches the Current Versions listed below, skip steps X to X and proceed to the next radio.&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the Update Tab, click Check for Updates, which will download the latest firmware version, and prompt to update the firmware in the connected radio.&lt;br /&gt;
# The utility will update the firmware in the connected radio. Do not disconnect the radio while the progress bars are visible.&lt;br /&gt;
# After the utility confirms a successful firmware update, disconnect the radio from your computer, and move the power switch off.&lt;br /&gt;
# Perform a Factory Reset of your radio, by holding the C key as you power on the radio.&lt;br /&gt;
# Repeat the above steps for all of your radios, making sure all firmware versions match the Current Versions listed below.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=====Current Firmware Versions=====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;text-align: center;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!''Radio''&lt;br /&gt;
!''Firmware Version''&lt;br /&gt;
!''Release Date''&lt;br /&gt;
!''Release Notes''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;text-align: left;&amp;quot;|MiniTT1 / FlexTT5 Canon&lt;br /&gt;
|6.700&lt;br /&gt;
|2014-08-05&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://www.pocketwizard.com/upload/photos/322MiniTT1FlexTT5_Canon_6_700_Firmware_Release_Notes.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;text-align: left;&amp;quot;|MiniTT1 / FlexTT5 Nikon&lt;br /&gt;
|3.700&lt;br /&gt;
|2014-08-05&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://www.pocketwizard.com/upload/photos/322MiniTT1FlexTT5_Nikon_3.700_Firmware_Release_Notes.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;text-align: left;&amp;quot;|PowerMC2&lt;br /&gt;
|2.400&lt;br /&gt;
|2013-06-11&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://www.pocketwizard.com/upload/photos/322PowerMC2_Firmware_ReleaseNotes_2.400.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;text-align: left;&amp;quot;|PowerST4&lt;br /&gt;
|5.400&lt;br /&gt;
|2013-06-11&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://www.pocketwizard.com/upload/photos/322ST4_Firmware_Release_Notes_5.400.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;text-align: left;&amp;quot;|Plus III&lt;br /&gt;
|1.200&lt;br /&gt;
|2013-06-11&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://www.pocketwizard.com/upload/photos/322Plus_III_Firmware_Release_Notes_1.200.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;text-align: left;&amp;quot;|MultiMAX&lt;br /&gt;
|7.53&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot;|[http://www.pocketwizard.com/upload/photos/733MM3_Eng_Man_LPF100v1.5_plus_Add_7.5v1.1_7.51RN_2.pdf See Manual]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
When available, information about Beta firmware is [http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=Beta_Firmware available here]. ''There are currently no beta firmware releases.''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====3. First Time Setup====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:50%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''MiniTT1 &amp;amp; FlexTT5 - Canon'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-collapsible-content&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# For the radio that will be used as the transmitter attached to your camera, change the Camera Model setting to match the camera the radio will be attached to for Configuration C1. This setting is located under the Misc tab when your radio is connected to the PocketWizard Utility. Make sure to Apply Changes in the bottom left of the Utility window after applying this setting. Once the radio has briefly disappeared and reappeared in the Utility window (which confirms the settings have been applied to the radio), you can disconnect the USB cable.&lt;br /&gt;
# Connect your receiving flashes to their respective FlexTT5's. Turn the flash on, and set it to the normal ETTL mode - NOT &amp;quot;Master&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Slave&amp;quot; mode. Then, turn the FlexTT5 on to Configuration C1. Within a few seconds, a low power flash will be emitted from the directly-connected flash, confirming the flash and FlexTT5 are communicating through the hotshoe properly.&lt;br /&gt;
# Connect the transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 to your camera. Turn the radio on to Configuration C1.&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn on the camera, and set to 1/160th shutter speed. Take a test shot with the camera at this shutter speed - the remote flash will not fire (this is a Calibration Shot for the radio). Take a second test shot, and your remote flashes will fire a TTL exposure!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Step 1 is only required once, or when the camera model changes. The normal power-up sequence is Steps 2-4.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These steps are for basic TTL operation.&lt;br /&gt;
Using an AC3? [http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=Ac3 Continue Here]&lt;br /&gt;
Using a Master Canon flash? [http://www.pocketwizard.com/inspirations/tutorials/ratios_flashoncamera/ Continue Here]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:50%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''MiniTT1 &amp;amp; FlexTT5 - Nikon'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-collapsible-content&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Set your camera to use Auto-FP. On most Nikon Cameras, this is Custom Function e1, located under the Pencil menu. This setting should be set to the slowest shutter speed with the &amp;quot;(Auto FP)&amp;quot; option. Most Nikon cameras will use &amp;quot;1/250 (Auto FP)&amp;quot;, although some will be 1/200 (Auto FP)&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Connect your receiving flashes to their respective FlexTT5's. Turn the flash on, and set it to the normal TTL mode - NOT &amp;quot;Master&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Slave&amp;quot; mode. Then, turn the FlexTT5 on to Configuration C1. Within a few seconds, a low power flash will be emitted from the directly-connected flash, confirming the flash and FlexTT5 are communicating through the hotshoe properly.&lt;br /&gt;
# Connect the transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 to your camera. Turn the radio on to Configuration C1.&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn on the camera, and set to 1/160th shutter speed. Take a test shot with the camera at this shutter speed - the remote flash will fire, but may not sync properly (this is a Calibration Shot for the radio). Take a second test shot, and your remote flashes will fire a TTL exposure!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Step 1 is only required once, or when you set up a new camera. The normal power-up sequence is Steps 2-4.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These steps are for basic TTL operation.&lt;br /&gt;
Using an AC3? [http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=Ac3 Continue Here]&lt;br /&gt;
Using a Master Nikon flash? [http://www.pocketwizard.com/inspirations/tutorials/sb900/ Continue Here]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:50%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''PowerST4'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-collapsible-content&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Connect your PowerST4 to your remote Elinchrom Flash, and power on the flash unit. The radio will power on when the flash is turned on.&lt;br /&gt;
# Follow the above instructions for starting up a Canon or Nikon transmitting radio.&lt;br /&gt;
# You will now be triggering your PowerST4! Use the in-camera Flash Exposure Compensation settings to adjust the power levels.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also use your AC3 or Canon / Nikon master flash controls to adjust the manual power level of the connected flash. See the respective links above.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:50%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''PowerMC2'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-collapsible-content&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Connect your PowerMC2 to your remote Einstein flash, and power on the flash unit. The radio will power on when the flash is turned on.&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the Einstein's LCD to change the Channel and Zone settings to channel: &amp;quot;CTL-01&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Zone A&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Follow the above instructions for starting up a Canon or Nikon transmitting radio.&lt;br /&gt;
# You will now be triggering your PowerMC2! Use the in-camera Flash Exposure Compensation settings to adjust the power levels.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also use your AC3 or Canon / Nikon master flash controls to adjust the manual power level of the connected flash. See the respective links above.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:50%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Plus III &amp;amp; MultiMAX'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-collapsible-content&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# With all equipment powered off, connect your remote radio to the camera or flash you'd like to trigger (with appropriate [http://www.pocketwizard.com/products/cable_accessory/ cable])&lt;br /&gt;
# Connect your transmitting radio to the hotshoe of your camera (or for a remote camera, simply have the radio in your hand)&lt;br /&gt;
# Power on the remote radio, the remote flash, and the transmitting radio.&lt;br /&gt;
# Ensure the Plus III's are set to TxRx mode, or for a MultiMAX that the transmitting radio is set to Transmit, and the receiver to Receive mode.&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the Channels and Zones to match.&lt;br /&gt;
# Take a test shot, or press the TEST button, and the remote unit will fire!&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====4. Further Reading====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For more information about specific topics, continue reading here:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Channels]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:[[HyperSync]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And for more radio-specific information, start here:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Plus III FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:[[PlusX FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:[[MultiMAX FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:[[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:[[PowerMC2 FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:[[PowerST4 FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:[[PocketWizard Utility FAQ]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ian</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=Getting_Started&amp;diff=3196</id>
		<title>Getting Started</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=Getting_Started&amp;diff=3196"/>
				<updated>2014-08-19T20:39:43Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ian: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
====1. Download the PocketWizard Utility====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:50%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Windows'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-collapsible-content&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Download the [http://utility.lpadesign.com/utility/PocketWizard%20Utility%20Setup.exe PocketWizard Utility Version 1.58 Installer for Windows]&lt;br /&gt;
# Save the installer to the directory of your choice (usually the Downloads folder)&lt;br /&gt;
# Run the Installer and follow the installation instructions&lt;br /&gt;
# The PocketWizard Utility is now installed in your Start Menu&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:50%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Mac'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-collapsible-content&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Download the appropriate PocketWizard Utility for your Mac:&lt;br /&gt;
#* [http://utility.lpadesign.com/utility/PocketWizard%20Utility%201.58.dmg PocketWizard Utility Version 1.58 for Intel Mac]&lt;br /&gt;
#* [http://utility.lpadesign.com/utility/PocketWizard%20Utility%201.54.dmg  PocketWizard Utility Version 1.54 for PowerPC Mac]&lt;br /&gt;
# Save the Disk Image file (.dmg) to the directory of your choice (usually the Downloads folder)&lt;br /&gt;
# Open the downloaded .dmg file&lt;br /&gt;
# Run the PocketWizard installer package within the Disk Image, and follow the installation prompts&lt;br /&gt;
# The PocketWizard Utility is now installed in your Applications folder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====2. Check for Updates====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:50%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''MiniTT1, FlexTT5, PowerST4, and PowerMC2'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-collapsible-content&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Launch the PocketWizard Utility&lt;br /&gt;
# Connect your radio to your computer via a Mini-B USB cable&lt;br /&gt;
# The connected radio will be displayed in the top left of the Utility window.&lt;br /&gt;
# Note the current Firmware Version of the connected radio. If the Firmware Version matches the Current Versions listed below, skip steps X to X and proceed to the next radio.&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the Update Tab, click Check for Updates, which will download the latest firmware version, and prompt to update the firmware in the connected radio.&lt;br /&gt;
# The utility will update the firmware in the connected radio. Do not disconnect the radio while the progress bars are visible.&lt;br /&gt;
# After the utility confirms a successful firmware update, disconnect the radio from your computer.&lt;br /&gt;
# Perform a Factory Reset of your radio, by holding TEST as you power on the radio for 10 seconds, until you see 4 green blinks in a row. [http://www.pocketwizard.com/inspirations/tutorials/reset_mode/ Click here to view a video of this reset process]&lt;br /&gt;
# Repeat the above steps for all of your radios, making sure all firmware versions match the Current Versions listed below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:50%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Plus III'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-collapsible-content&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Launch the PocketWizard Utility&lt;br /&gt;
# Connect your radio to your computer via a Mini-B USB cable&lt;br /&gt;
# The connected radio will be displayed in the top left of the Utility window.&lt;br /&gt;
# Note the current Firmware Version of the connected radio. If the Firmware Version matches the Current Versions listed below, skip steps X to X and proceed to the next radio.&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the Update Tab, click Check for Updates, which will download the latest firmware version, and prompt to update the firmware in the connected radio.&lt;br /&gt;
# The utility will update the firmware in the connected radio. Do not disconnect the radio while the progress bars are visible.&lt;br /&gt;
# After the utility confirms a successful firmware update, disconnect the radio from your computer, and move the power switch off.&lt;br /&gt;
# Perform a Factory Reset of your radio, by holding the TEST button as you power on the radio.&lt;br /&gt;
# Repeat the above steps for all of your radios, making sure all firmware versions match the Current Versions listed below.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:50%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''MultiMAX'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-collapsible-content&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Launch the PocketWizard Utility&lt;br /&gt;
# Enable USB Mode on the MultiMAX:&lt;br /&gt;
#* Turn off the MultiMAX&lt;br /&gt;
#* Hold the Backlight button (between TEST and MENU), and connect the Mini-B USB cable to your computer&lt;br /&gt;
#* Continue to hold the Backlight button, and move the power switch to Transmit&lt;br /&gt;
#* Release the Backlight button&lt;br /&gt;
# The connected radio will be displayed in the top left of the Utility window.&lt;br /&gt;
# Note the current Firmware Version of the connected radio. If the Firmware Version matches the Current Versions listed below, skip steps X to X and proceed to the next radio.&lt;br /&gt;
# Under the Update Tab, click Check for Updates, which will download the latest firmware version, and prompt to update the firmware in the connected radio.&lt;br /&gt;
# The utility will update the firmware in the connected radio. Do not disconnect the radio while the progress bars are visible.&lt;br /&gt;
# After the utility confirms a successful firmware update, disconnect the radio from your computer, and move the power switch off.&lt;br /&gt;
# Perform a Factory Reset of your radio, by holding the C key as you power on the radio.&lt;br /&gt;
# Repeat the above steps for all of your radios, making sure all firmware versions match the Current Versions listed below.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=====Current Firmware Versions=====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;text-align: center;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!''Radio''&lt;br /&gt;
!''Firmware Version''&lt;br /&gt;
!''Release Date''&lt;br /&gt;
!''Release Notes''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;text-align: left;&amp;quot;|MiniTT1 / FlexTT5 Canon&lt;br /&gt;
|6.700&lt;br /&gt;
|2014-08-05&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://www.pocketwizard.com/upload/photos/322MiniTT1FlexTT5_Canon_6_700_Firmware_Release_Notes.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;text-align: left;&amp;quot;|MiniTT1 / FlexTT5 Nikon&lt;br /&gt;
|3.700&lt;br /&gt;
|2014-08-05&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://www.pocketwizard.com/upload/photos/322MiniTT1FlexTT5_Nikon_3.700_Firmware_Release_Notes.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;text-align: left;&amp;quot;|PowerMC2&lt;br /&gt;
|2.400&lt;br /&gt;
|2013-06-11&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://www.pocketwizard.com/upload/photos/322PowerMC2_Firmware_ReleaseNotes_2.400.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;text-align: left;&amp;quot;|PowerST4&lt;br /&gt;
|5.400&lt;br /&gt;
|2013-06-11&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://www.pocketwizard.com/upload/photos/322ST4_Firmware_Release_Notes_5.400.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;text-align: left;&amp;quot;|Plus III&lt;br /&gt;
|1.200&lt;br /&gt;
|2013-06-11&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://www.pocketwizard.com/upload/photos/322Plus_III_Firmware_Release_Notes_1.200.pdf Release Notes]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;text-align: left;&amp;quot;|MultiMAX&lt;br /&gt;
|7.53&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot;|[http://www.pocketwizard.com/upload/photos/733MM3_Eng_Man_LPF100v1.5_plus_Add_7.5v1.1_7.51RN_2.pdf See Manual]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
When available, information about Beta firmware is [http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=Beta_Firmware available here]. ''There are currently no beta firmware releases.''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;Br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Before You Begin ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this is the first time you are using a remote TTL flash system, we recommend you consult your camera and flash manuals for the basics of positioning your flash units.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Review the owner’s manuals for your camera and flash system. For most basic functions when using Canon or Nikon’s system with PocketWizard's, operation is identical. Important exceptions will be noted in this wiki.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Turn Everything OFF ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PoweringOn1.jpg|right|300px|Power Switch OFF]]&lt;br /&gt;
All equipment should be turned OFF when making connections.  If not, unwanted triggering may occur when inserting or removing a flash or connecting a camera cable.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Turn OFF your PocketWizard radios, electronic flash units, cameras, etc., before changing batteries in the flashes, cameras, or radios.'''  See the [[Batteries]] section for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ControlTL radios use information presented by the camera and flash when the camera wakes up.  If you do not power off your gear when making changes to your equipment, like adding a flash or accessory to the top shoe or changing the camera body in use, then this information is missed and the radios may not perform properly.  If you do not power off the equipment, try letting your camera enter a sleep cycle when making equipment changes: wait for the meters to turn off in the viewfinder (entering sleep), then half-press the shutter to exit sleep.  This may restore proper operation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== First Shot ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The first exposure after making initial connections or powering on may not be properly exposed. The first shot is a camera calibration shot for Canon radios and will not fire your remote flashes. '''Always test fire at least twice!'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Transmitters ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may use a FlexTT5 as a transmitter instead of a MiniTT1 in all scenarios.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Channels ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make sure all PocketWizard radios are set to the same PocketWizard channels. The PocketWizard channel is used instead of Nikon or Canon’s communication channel.  See the [[Channels]] section for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Don't use REMOTE or SLAVE mode ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Always set your remote TTL flashes to standard i-TTL/E-TTL mode.  Do not use MASTER, REMOTE, or SLAVE modes on your remote flashes.  The ControlTL system talks to your flash via the hot shoe and SLAVE/REMOTE modes do not communicate through the shoe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Canon''' flashes set to &amp;lt;SLAVE&amp;gt; and connected to FlexTT5 radios will have slave mode automatically turned off, but will still function as slaves correctly. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Nikon''' flashes set to REMOTE and connected to FlexTT5 will not function as remotes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Set the remote/slave group A, B, or C, via the FlexTT5 Zone Switch.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Powering On ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PoweringOn2.jpg|right|300px|Power switch ON and set to C.1]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Turn OFF all your PocketWizard radios, electronic flashes, cameras, etc., before making connections.&lt;br /&gt;
#When all equipment is connected, turn ON your equipment starting from the top and working your way down. &lt;br /&gt;
##Turn on your flash first&lt;br /&gt;
##Next, turn on the PocketWizard radio by setting the power switch to C.1 or C.2.  Verify [[Status LED]] blinks normally (short blink every 2 seconds)&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;(see the [[PocketWizard Utility]] for more information on C.1 and C.2)&lt;br /&gt;
##Turn on your camera last (if using radio/flash on-camera)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The first exposure after making initial connections and powering on may not be properly exposed. The first shot is a camera calibration shot for Canon and will not fire your remote flashes. Always test at least twice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NOTE: With Canon radios, a few flash adjustments may not be available when the flash is in the shoe of a powered on MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 and sitting on an active camera. For example, you cannot take a 580EX II out of &amp;lt;MASTER&amp;gt; mode if the flash is in the hot shoe of a powered on remote FlexTT5. Turn the MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 off and wait for the camera to sleep, or remove the flash from the shoe to access these special mode changes.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ian</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=PowerMC2&amp;diff=2752</id>
		<title>PowerMC2</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=PowerMC2&amp;diff=2752"/>
				<updated>2013-12-06T22:29:05Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ian: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;NOTICE:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We have identified a potentially hazardous issue with the PocketWizard® PowerMC2 receiver, designed for use with the Paul C. Buff Einstein™ flash units, especially the CE/433 MHz version.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the PowerMC2’s antenna cover is broken, removed, or in any way damaged, DISCONTINUE USE IMMEDIATELY and contact PocketWizard®. In rare circumstances, &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;exposed metal components&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; on the PowerMC2 can become electrified, posing a very serious shock hazard.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Customers in the United States may continue to safely use the Einstein and PowerMC2 with the power cord supplied by the manufacturer and a properly wired three-pronged outlet or with the Vagabond battery pack.   All other customers are advised to contact us immediately for assistance in replacing a broken, removed or damaged antenna cover.  If a U.S.-style three-pronged outlet is unavailable in your location, ALWAYS UNPLUG THE FLASH PRIOR TO HANDLING THE POWERMC2.&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We are working to correct the issue.  We greatly apologize for this inconvenience.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have any questions or concerns please contact Pocket Wizard Technical Support at +1 802-735-1079 or via our [http://www.pocketwizard.com/contact/inquiry/ inquiry page].&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Receiver with ControlTL® for Einstein­™ E640 Flash==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PWPOWERMC2.jpg|right|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The PowerMC2 Receiver Module enables remote power control of Einstein™ E640 flashes using PocketWizard [[ControlTL]] technology.  With a [[MiniTT1_and_FlexTT5|MiniTT1 Transmitter or FlexTT5 Transceiver]] on your camera and a PowerMC2 plugged into your Einstein™ E640 flash, you can now adjust the flash power settings directly from the camera position. Add the [[AC3 ZoneController]] and you can control three different zones of lights in 1/3-stop increments with up to a six-stop range.  Utilize PocketWizard’s unique features such as [[HyperSync]] and Optimized [[Rear Curtain Sync]] for maximum control of your lighting.&lt;br /&gt;
{{PowerMC2Wallace}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Special Warning==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When connecting the PowerMC2 to the [[PocketWizard Utility]], make sure to disconnect the PowerMC2 from any attached flash first.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Do not connect the PowerMC2 to USB while also connected to the Einstein E640 flash.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Damage to your PowerMC2, Einstein, or Computer's USB port could result.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Using your PowerMC2==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PowerMC2Einstein.jpg|right|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
'''1.''' Connect the PowerMC2 to your Einstein™ E640 Flash via the remote port, then power on the flash.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''2.''' Select the Channel and Zone A, B, or C via the E640’s LCD.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''3.''' Set up your PocketWizard transmitter and take pictures normally. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''4.''' Adjust the camera’s Flash Exposure Compensation (FEC) to adjust the power of your remote flash. See the [[#Basic Power Control|Basic Power Control]] section for more information about FEC.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Make sure all your radios are set to the same PocketWizard [[Channels|channel]].'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Status LED blinks '''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:green;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Green&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''' every few seconds to indicate normal operation. It will blink '''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Red&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''' in sync with a trigger. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Momentarily pressing TEST will test trigger the flash.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your PowerMC2 needs to be on the same channel as your transmitter. [[Channels]] can be set via the Einstein’s built-in LCD. The PowerMC2 is capable of receiving on either ControlTL Channels for use with ControlTL radios like the MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 or [[Channels#Standard_Channels|Standard Channels]] for triggering with the [[Plus II]], [[MultiMAX]], and [[Sekonic]] meters. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To set the channel, press the Einstein’s™ FUNCTION button until the Channel selection box is highlighted, and then change channels with the ADJUST buttons. Press the FUNCTION button again to specify a zone. When using ControlTL Channels, or Standard Channels 17-32, you can specify zone A, B, or C.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note:''' When receiving on Standard Channels, the PowerMC2 will be unable to do any form of PowerTracking, or remote Manual Power Control. You must be using a ControlTL radio in ControlTL radio mode for the Einstein to be able to engage in any form of ControlTL feature.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
===== [[ControlTL]] =====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:controltl.jpg|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
PocketWizard’s newest firmware platform taps into the camera’s digital communications to enable an entirely new level of remote flash capability through our proven radio system.   ControlTL allows remote [[Basic Wireless TTL|TTL]] systems as well as Manual Power Control.  ControlTL firmware is configurable and [[PocketWizard Utility|upgradeable]] for “future-proof” continuous improvement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Manual Power Control =====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:manual_power_control.jpg|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
Adjust the manual power settings of your remote Einstein flash directly from a [[AC3 ZoneController]], or master flash mounted on your on-camera [[MiniTT1_and_FlexTT5|MiniTT1 or FlexTT5]].  You can independently control the power output of up to three remote groups of lights (you can have as many lights in each group as you want) from full power down to the lowest setting through the user interface on the back of the master flash or with the dials of the AC3 ZoneController.   Now you can work with total control with your remote lights, without leaving your shooting position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== [[HyperSync]] =====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Hypersync.jpg|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
Our patent pending HyperSync® technology allows photographers to achieve faster X-sync speeds with full power flash.  That extra speed can be used to freeze action or cut ambient light - both of which can produce results never possible before. HyperSync works automatically with the PowerMC2.  All you need is a MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 on camera to gain the benefits of HyperSync. While performance varies by the camera and flash equipment being used, HyperSync will get the maximum possible out of any configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== [[PowerTracking]] =====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:powertracking.jpg|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
When working with certain manual flashes, you can change any of your settings on your camera and the system adjusts for those settings.  Change your camera's exposure compensation to adjust the flash output, or make adjustments in aperture or ISO and the system balances your flash for proper exposure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Note that Flash Exposure Compensation can also be dialed in on a per-flash basis, by changing the PowerMC2's settings in the [[Exposure Tab]] of the [[PocketWizard Utility]].''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[PowerTracking#Basic Power Control|Basic Power Control]]====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With only a MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 on your camera, your camera’s FEC (Flash Exposure Compensation) control will adjust your flash power output level for all your PowerMC2-connected flashes as shown in the table below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Camera FEC/EC &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; - or -&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;AC3 Power Dial in Manual'''&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Einstein E640 Power Output'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| +3&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |1/1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| +2.7&lt;br /&gt;
|1/2 + 0.6&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| +2.3&lt;br /&gt;
|1/2 + 0.3&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| +2&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |1/2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| +1.7&lt;br /&gt;
|1/4 + 0.6&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| +1.3&lt;br /&gt;
|1/4 + 0.3&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| +1&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |1/4&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| +0.7&lt;br /&gt;
|1/8 + 0.6&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| +0.3&lt;br /&gt;
|1/8 + 0.6&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|0&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |1/8&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -0.3&lt;br /&gt;
|1/16 + 0.6&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -0.7&lt;br /&gt;
| 1/16 + 0.3&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -1&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |1/16&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -1.3&lt;br /&gt;
| 1/32 + 0.6&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -1.7&lt;br /&gt;
|1/32 + 0.3 &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -2&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |1/32&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -2.3&lt;br /&gt;
|1/64 + 0.6&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -2.7&lt;br /&gt;
| 1/64 + 0.3&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -3&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |1/64&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Specifications====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Frequency'''&lt;br /&gt;
|340.00 - 354.00 US FCC/IC &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;433.42 - 434.42 MHz - CE&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Channels'''&lt;br /&gt;
|52 Channels over 26 Frequencies - US FCC/IC &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; 35 Channels over 5 Frequencies - CE&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Antenna'''&lt;br /&gt;
|2.7&amp;quot; (6.9 cm) rubberized&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Mounting'''&lt;br /&gt;
|Eight-pin remote socket&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Zone Select Switch'''&lt;br /&gt;
|A-B-C 	 Plus channel &amp;quot;D&amp;quot; if receiving on a MultiMAX channel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Status Indicator'''&lt;br /&gt;
|LED: Green, Amber, Red Status indications&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''USB'''&lt;br /&gt;
|USB Compliant 2.0, Mini-B Connector, 5VDC regulated, 100mA, Pin 1 Positive, Pin 4 Ground&amp;lt;BR&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;DO NOT CONNECT RADIO TO USB WHILE ALSO CONNECTED TO EINSTEIN FLASH.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Operating Temperature'''&lt;br /&gt;
|Above -15° C (5° F) and below 50° C (120° F)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Storage Temperature'''&lt;br /&gt;
|Above -30° C (22° F) and below 85° C (185° F)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Construction'''&lt;br /&gt;
|high impact plastic, rubberized antenna, ''RoHS Compliant''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Power'''&lt;br /&gt;
|Receives power from attached flash&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Dimensions'''&lt;br /&gt;
|4.66&amp;quot; (11.84 cm) long x 1.29&amp;quot; (3.27 cm) wide x .43&amp;quot; (1.09 cm) depth&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Weight'''&lt;br /&gt;
|.77 ounces (21.83 grams)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Requirements'''&lt;br /&gt;
|Must be used in conjunction with a MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 on camera for power control capability.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;May be paired with any PocketWizard transmitter or transceiver for simple triggering.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ian</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=PowerMC2&amp;diff=2751</id>
		<title>PowerMC2</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=PowerMC2&amp;diff=2751"/>
				<updated>2013-12-06T22:25:39Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ian: Added notice about MC2zap&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|We have identified a potentially hazardous issue with the PocketWizard® PowerMC2 receiver, designed for use with the Paul C. Buff Einstein™ flash units, especially the CE/433 MHz version.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the PowerMC2’s antenna cover is broken, removed, or in any way damaged, DISCONTINUE USE IMMEDIATELY and contact PocketWizard®. In rare circumstances, &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;exposed metal components&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; on the PowerMC2 can become electrified, posing a very serious shock hazard.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Customers in the United States may continue to safely use the Einstein and PowerMC2 with the power cord supplied by the manufacturer and a properly wired three-pronged outlet or with the Vagabond battery pack.   All other customers are advised to contact us immediately for assistance in replacing a broken, removed or damaged antenna cover.  If a U.S.-style three-pronged outlet is unavailable in your location, ALWAYS UNPLUG THE FLASH PRIOR TO HANDLING THE POWERMC2.&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We are working to correct the issue.  We greatly apologize for this inconvenience.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have any questions or concerns please contact Pocket Wizard Technical Support at +1 802-735-1079 or via our [http://www.pocketwizard.com/contact/inquiry/ inquiry page].&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Receiver with ControlTL® for Einstein­™ E640 Flash==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PWPOWERMC2.jpg|right|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The PowerMC2 Receiver Module enables remote power control of Einstein™ E640 flashes using PocketWizard [[ControlTL]] technology.  With a [[MiniTT1_and_FlexTT5|MiniTT1 Transmitter or FlexTT5 Transceiver]] on your camera and a PowerMC2 plugged into your Einstein™ E640 flash, you can now adjust the flash power settings directly from the camera position. Add the [[AC3 ZoneController]] and you can control three different zones of lights in 1/3-stop increments with up to a six-stop range.  Utilize PocketWizard’s unique features such as [[HyperSync]] and Optimized [[Rear Curtain Sync]] for maximum control of your lighting.&lt;br /&gt;
{{PowerMC2Wallace}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Special Warning==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When connecting the PowerMC2 to the [[PocketWizard Utility]], make sure to disconnect the PowerMC2 from any attached flash first.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Do not connect the PowerMC2 to USB while also connected to the Einstein E640 flash.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Damage to your PowerMC2, Einstein, or Computer's USB port could result.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Using your PowerMC2==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PowerMC2Einstein.jpg|right|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
'''1.''' Connect the PowerMC2 to your Einstein™ E640 Flash via the remote port, then power on the flash.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''2.''' Select the Channel and Zone A, B, or C via the E640’s LCD.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''3.''' Set up your PocketWizard transmitter and take pictures normally. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''4.''' Adjust the camera’s Flash Exposure Compensation (FEC) to adjust the power of your remote flash. See the [[#Basic Power Control|Basic Power Control]] section for more information about FEC.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Make sure all your radios are set to the same PocketWizard [[Channels|channel]].'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Status LED blinks '''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:green;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Green&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''' every few seconds to indicate normal operation. It will blink '''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Red&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''' in sync with a trigger. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Momentarily pressing TEST will test trigger the flash.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your PowerMC2 needs to be on the same channel as your transmitter. [[Channels]] can be set via the Einstein’s built-in LCD. The PowerMC2 is capable of receiving on either ControlTL Channels for use with ControlTL radios like the MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 or [[Channels#Standard_Channels|Standard Channels]] for triggering with the [[Plus II]], [[MultiMAX]], and [[Sekonic]] meters. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To set the channel, press the Einstein’s™ FUNCTION button until the Channel selection box is highlighted, and then change channels with the ADJUST buttons. Press the FUNCTION button again to specify a zone. When using ControlTL Channels, or Standard Channels 17-32, you can specify zone A, B, or C.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note:''' When receiving on Standard Channels, the PowerMC2 will be unable to do any form of PowerTracking, or remote Manual Power Control. You must be using a ControlTL radio in ControlTL radio mode for the Einstein to be able to engage in any form of ControlTL feature.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
===== [[ControlTL]] =====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:controltl.jpg|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
PocketWizard’s newest firmware platform taps into the camera’s digital communications to enable an entirely new level of remote flash capability through our proven radio system.   ControlTL allows remote [[Basic Wireless TTL|TTL]] systems as well as Manual Power Control.  ControlTL firmware is configurable and [[PocketWizard Utility|upgradeable]] for “future-proof” continuous improvement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Manual Power Control =====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:manual_power_control.jpg|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
Adjust the manual power settings of your remote Einstein flash directly from a [[AC3 ZoneController]], or master flash mounted on your on-camera [[MiniTT1_and_FlexTT5|MiniTT1 or FlexTT5]].  You can independently control the power output of up to three remote groups of lights (you can have as many lights in each group as you want) from full power down to the lowest setting through the user interface on the back of the master flash or with the dials of the AC3 ZoneController.   Now you can work with total control with your remote lights, without leaving your shooting position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== [[HyperSync]] =====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Hypersync.jpg|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
Our patent pending HyperSync® technology allows photographers to achieve faster X-sync speeds with full power flash.  That extra speed can be used to freeze action or cut ambient light - both of which can produce results never possible before. HyperSync works automatically with the PowerMC2.  All you need is a MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 on camera to gain the benefits of HyperSync. While performance varies by the camera and flash equipment being used, HyperSync will get the maximum possible out of any configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== [[PowerTracking]] =====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:powertracking.jpg|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
When working with certain manual flashes, you can change any of your settings on your camera and the system adjusts for those settings.  Change your camera's exposure compensation to adjust the flash output, or make adjustments in aperture or ISO and the system balances your flash for proper exposure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Note that Flash Exposure Compensation can also be dialed in on a per-flash basis, by changing the PowerMC2's settings in the [[Exposure Tab]] of the [[PocketWizard Utility]].''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[PowerTracking#Basic Power Control|Basic Power Control]]====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With only a MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 on your camera, your camera’s FEC (Flash Exposure Compensation) control will adjust your flash power output level for all your PowerMC2-connected flashes as shown in the table below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Camera FEC/EC &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; - or -&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;AC3 Power Dial in Manual'''&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Einstein E640 Power Output'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| +3&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |1/1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| +2.7&lt;br /&gt;
|1/2 + 0.6&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| +2.3&lt;br /&gt;
|1/2 + 0.3&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| +2&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |1/2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| +1.7&lt;br /&gt;
|1/4 + 0.6&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| +1.3&lt;br /&gt;
|1/4 + 0.3&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| +1&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |1/4&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| +0.7&lt;br /&gt;
|1/8 + 0.6&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| +0.3&lt;br /&gt;
|1/8 + 0.6&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|0&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |1/8&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -0.3&lt;br /&gt;
|1/16 + 0.6&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -0.7&lt;br /&gt;
| 1/16 + 0.3&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -1&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |1/16&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -1.3&lt;br /&gt;
| 1/32 + 0.6&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -1.7&lt;br /&gt;
|1/32 + 0.3 &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -2&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |1/32&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -2.3&lt;br /&gt;
|1/64 + 0.6&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -2.7&lt;br /&gt;
| 1/64 + 0.3&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -3&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |1/64&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Specifications====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Frequency'''&lt;br /&gt;
|340.00 - 354.00 US FCC/IC &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;433.42 - 434.42 MHz - CE&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Channels'''&lt;br /&gt;
|52 Channels over 26 Frequencies - US FCC/IC &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; 35 Channels over 5 Frequencies - CE&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Antenna'''&lt;br /&gt;
|2.7&amp;quot; (6.9 cm) rubberized&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Mounting'''&lt;br /&gt;
|Eight-pin remote socket&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Zone Select Switch'''&lt;br /&gt;
|A-B-C 	 Plus channel &amp;quot;D&amp;quot; if receiving on a MultiMAX channel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Status Indicator'''&lt;br /&gt;
|LED: Green, Amber, Red Status indications&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''USB'''&lt;br /&gt;
|USB Compliant 2.0, Mini-B Connector, 5VDC regulated, 100mA, Pin 1 Positive, Pin 4 Ground&amp;lt;BR&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;DO NOT CONNECT RADIO TO USB WHILE ALSO CONNECTED TO EINSTEIN FLASH.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Operating Temperature'''&lt;br /&gt;
|Above -15° C (5° F) and below 50° C (120° F)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Storage Temperature'''&lt;br /&gt;
|Above -30° C (22° F) and below 85° C (185° F)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Construction'''&lt;br /&gt;
|high impact plastic, rubberized antenna, ''RoHS Compliant''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Power'''&lt;br /&gt;
|Receives power from attached flash&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Dimensions'''&lt;br /&gt;
|4.66&amp;quot; (11.84 cm) long x 1.29&amp;quot; (3.27 cm) wide x .43&amp;quot; (1.09 cm) depth&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Weight'''&lt;br /&gt;
|.77 ounces (21.83 grams)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Requirements'''&lt;br /&gt;
|Must be used in conjunction with a MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 on camera for power control capability.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;May be paired with any PocketWizard transmitter or transceiver for simple triggering.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ian</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=Long_Range_Performance&amp;diff=1066</id>
		<title>Long Range Performance</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=Long_Range_Performance&amp;diff=1066"/>
				<updated>2012-03-12T14:09:31Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ian: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{recommended reading|MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 Specifications|}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{ Annotated image |float=right| caption=Antenna performance comparisons.&lt;br /&gt;
| image=LongRangePerformanceGraphic.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Long distance performance from your PocketWizards depends on the orientation and position of the radios.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Whenever possible, try to maintain a line of sight between the radios and keep the antennas parallel. While radio does not require line of sight, it does help dramatically.  Make sure the radios are not near any large metal, concrete, or high water-content objects. People and trees are mostly water!  Make sure they are not blocked by these objects or by hills.  Do not mount the radios close to the ground – try to have them several feet above the Earth or building floors whenever possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Maintain at least 36&amp;quot; (~ 1 meter) distance between antennas. Avoid direct antenna contact with anything metallic. “Dead spots” have a number of causes, but the solution is usually the same: move the radio a few inches or feet away from the problem area. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''SPECIAL NOTE''''':  Some Canon flash models emit RF interference that can reduce the effective operating range of many radio slaves, including the FlexTT5.  Those models include: 430 EX, 580EX, 580EX II and others. See the [[Canon Compatibility]] page for more information.  For those model flashes, please consider the mounting suggestions in the pictures above to optimize range.  If using Canon’s off shoe cord OC-E3, consider adding a ferrite clamp on the cable near the flash to further increase range.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Range Extending Options=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Orientation==&lt;br /&gt;
'''Solutions for improved range performance with the Canon 430EX, 580EX and 580EX II flashes.''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- These flashes emit high levels of RF interference that can affect any PocketWizard radio.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- NOTE: The Canon 430EX II, 550EX, 420EX and 270EX have excellent range performance because they do not have high RF noise emissions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every electronic device emits some amount of unintended radio frequency(RF) noise.  These emissions can range from very little to a lot depending on many factors.  This noise can be troublesome for any radio device that depends on receiving radio signals because the RF noise may make it harder for the device to hear the incoming signal.  It’s the same as trying to listen to someone talk at a party when everyone around you is talking at the same time and the noise level is very high.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{ Annotated image |float=right| caption=AC5 on a Canon 580 EX II.&lt;br /&gt;
| image=AC5_image.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
| image-width=224&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A few Canon flashes, including the popular 580EX II, 580EX and 430EX, emit strong RF noise across the frequency range used by PocketWizard radios, impacting both the FCC 344MHz radios used in the American market and the CE 433MHz radios used in Europe and other international markets.&lt;br /&gt;
This interference can impede the out-of-box range performance with any PocketWizard radio. We have found that the amount of interference varies from flash to flash so it is impossible to say precisely what the impact is. In our testing, we found some 580EX II's worked consistently on an FCC 344MHz FlexTT5 Transceiver in the upright position at 100 feet (33 meters) or more. However, some flashes we tested were noisier and in the worst-case scenarios, without any intervening steps to improve range, consistent working range was reduced to 30 feet (10 meters). &lt;br /&gt;
There are several ways to improve signal reception and thus increasing the range performance of the radios. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Although many of these solutions are demonstrated with a receiving FlexTT5, they can be applied to any PocketWizard radio, including the Plus II and MultiMAX.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''  Read More About Internal Modification to Canon 580EX II reduces RF emissions.[http://www.pocketwizard.com/support/tech_bulletins/580exii_mod/ here].'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''The AC5 RF Soft Shield is now available, this is your first line of defense against noisey flashes.  With the AC5 correctly installed, your range will increase substantially.  For information on how to properly install the the AC5, click [http://www.pocketwizard.com/inspirations/tutorials/ac5_install/ here].'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Use the default C2 setting on the receiving FlexTT5 Transceiver===&lt;br /&gt;
This channel uses a different frequency than C1 and may reduce RF noise interference and increase range from 10 to 30%.  You can also try other channels that operate at different frequencies, especially around 345 to 347 MHz, which include channels 2, 4, 5, 6 &amp;amp; 20.  A channel frequency guide can be found on the [[Channels|Channels page.]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Use a FlexTT5 Transceiver as your transmitter and your receiver.===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As a transmitter, the FlexTT5 Transceiver has a more optimize-able antenna than the MiniTT1 Transmitter and will improve range up to 20%.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
===Straighten out the flash head.===&lt;br /&gt;
Lay it on its side and put the antenna in a 180º position.  This should increase range from 50 to 100%. &lt;br /&gt;
                    &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{ Annotated image |float=left| caption=Better&lt;br /&gt;
| image=Flash_straight_out.jpg &lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{ Annotated image |float=left| caption=Best&lt;br /&gt;
| image=Flash_best.jpg &lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Orient your antenna so that the tip of the antenna is a vertical straight line with the opposite corner of the FlexTT5 Transceiver.===  &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Yes, it's a bit contorted but it works.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:FlexOptimal.jpg|200px|thumb|left|Optimal Antenna Position]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Hardware Options=&lt;br /&gt;
==Use a Canon OC-E3 cord.==&lt;br /&gt;
Ideally, use the cord with a ferrite choke added to the end of the cord nearest the flash, to separate the flash from the FlexTT5 Transceiver.&lt;br /&gt;
For best performance, the FlexTT5 should be 18” or more away from the flash and ideally positioned above it (the higher the radio, the better the reception). For best results, the FlexTT5 should be positioned at least five feet off the ground.  This should increase range from 200 to 500%.   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{ Annotated image |float=left| caption=Better&lt;br /&gt;
| image=Flex_below_flash.jpg‎&lt;br /&gt;
| image-width= 200&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{ Annotated image |float=left| caption=Best&lt;br /&gt;
| image=Flex_above_flash.jpg &lt;br /&gt;
| image-width= 200&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{ Annotated image |float=left| caption=Ferrite Choke&lt;br /&gt;
| image=564Optimize-0318.jpg‎  &lt;br /&gt;
| image-width= 200&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Mount your flash on one light stand and your FlexTT5 Transceiver on another stand.==&lt;br /&gt;
Just be sure there is at least 18&amp;quot; between the Flash and the FlexTT5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Use a wide dual light bracket to separate the FlexTT5 Transciever from the flash. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{ Annotated image |float=left| caption=Dual Flash Bracket with OC-E3 cord.&lt;br /&gt;
| image=Dualflashbracket.jpg &lt;br /&gt;
| image-width=250&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
- Use a Manfrotto Superclamp and Flexible Arm attached to a light stand, as seen here when used with a softbox.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{ Annotated image |float=left |caption=Rear View.&lt;br /&gt;
| image=Flashsoftbox2.jpg‎  &lt;br /&gt;
| image-width=250&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{ Annotated image |float=left |caption= Front view.&lt;br /&gt;
| image=Flashsoftbox.jpg‎  &lt;br /&gt;
| image-width=250&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Use flashes that have no noise issues.==&lt;br /&gt;
{{ Annotated image |float=right| caption=270EX Speedlite.&lt;br /&gt;
| image=270EX.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
| image-width=150}}&lt;br /&gt;
These flashes include the 430EX II,  550EX and the 270EX. The 430EX II provides almost as much light as the bigger 580EX II. This flash is smaller and less expensive then the 580EX II.  Another alternative is the 270EX flash.  The range of this flash is almost as good as the 430EX II.  It is compact and easy to carry with the FlexTT5. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Use a PocketWizard designed AC7 Hard Shield for Canon Speedlites.==&lt;br /&gt;
{{ Annotated image |float=right| caption=AC7 Hard Shield.&lt;br /&gt;
| image=AC7.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
| image-width=200}}&lt;br /&gt;
To enhance the ControlTL™ System range performance when paired with the Canon 580EX, 580EX II and 430EX flashes, PocketWizard developed the AC7 Hard Shield. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The body of the AC7 Hard Shield is made with a material that effectively blocks RF interference (EMI) from clouding the FlexTT5 antenna.  To block noise traveling through  connections in the hot shoe, an electronic filter has been added to a hot shoe built into the AC7.  Combined, the AC7 shield allows the FlexTT5 to receive transmissions at distances 300 to 500% farther then before and well within the range of most off-camera lighting needs.  [http://www.pocketwizard.com/products/transmitter_receiver/ac7%20rf%20hard%20shield/ Read more...]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Use a PocketWizard designed AC5 Soft Shield for Canon Speedlites.==&lt;br /&gt;
{{ Annotated image |float=right| caption=AC5 Soft Shield.&lt;br /&gt;
| image=AC5_image.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
| image-width=200}}&lt;br /&gt;
The AC5 RF Soft Shield was designed to block the RF emissions from certain flashes (580EX II, 580EX and 430EX) from interfering with the FlexTT5, allowing the FlexTT5 to work at considerably longer range.  For proper performance the AC5 must be installed correctly. You can see how to properly install the AC5 Soft Shield [ here]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ian</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=The_FAQ&amp;diff=1065</id>
		<title>The FAQ</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=The_FAQ&amp;diff=1065"/>
				<updated>2012-03-06T16:04:31Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ian: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'''Our TOP TEN (plus one) most asked simple questions.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It’s understandable you might get into a situation while working with the [[MiniTT1_and_FlexTT5|MiniTT1® and FlexTT5®]] and today’s complex camera systems where you’re not sure why something isn’t working as you would expect it. Most of the time, there is a simple solution. We asked our [http://www.pocketwizard.com/contact/inquiry/ tech support] crew to give us the “Top Ten” questions consumers asked to keep their system working properly. Here they are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Nothing is working! What should I do?====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A: Try these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Check the [[batteries]]: weak batteries can cause strange behavior.&lt;br /&gt;
*Make sure all radios are updated to the latest [[PocketWizard Utility|firmware]]. Try our [[Beta Lab|beta firmware]] as it often has new fixes ready to be tried.&lt;br /&gt;
*Also check the firmware in your camera, and flashes if applicable!&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Factory Reset]] the radios.&lt;br /&gt;
*Take your first shot at 1/160th or 1/200th so the system can properly calibrate timing.&lt;br /&gt;
*Wait about 3 seconds after turning on your radio before taking your first picture.&lt;br /&gt;
*Take your time! Whenever possible, compose the image with the shutter release half-pressed before taking the picture.&lt;br /&gt;
*If still having issues after trying the above, save your camera’s custom functions, reset the camera, then start adding them back in one at a time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====In what order should I turn things on?====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A: Top down: Flash, then radio, then camera. Wait 2-3 seconds between each step. Older Quick Guides may have this slightly different, but top down works for all current radios and firmware.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
====My Nikon camera won’t let me choose a shutter speed faster than x-sync. How can I shoot at faster shutter speeds?====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A: Nikon cameras require that FP-sync is enabled to shoot faster than x-sync if they detect a TTL-capable device in their hot shoe. Enabling FP-sync is done in the Custom Settings menu. Set “e1 flash sync speed” to 1/250s (Auto FP).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Note that some cameras may have different a different menu setting to enable Auto FP, and that some cameras are not capable of HSS/FP-Sync operation. Check your camera's manual for more information.''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====The ISO on my remote Nikon Speedlight is stuck at 200. What’s wrong?====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A: It isn’t required for TTL operation on the remote flash and has no effect on exposure, so the radios do not transmit camera setting information like ISO to remote flashes. The remote FlexTT5 simply gives the flash a default value on power-up, which is ISO 200.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====I set my speedlight to MASTER and stuck it on a remote FlexTT5. Why won’t it control other flashes when I have a MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 on my camera?====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A: The ControlTL® system, just like Nikon and Canon native systems, expects the MASTER speedlight to be only at the camera position so “Remote MASTER” operation is not supported. Setting a remote flash to MASTER mode will result in an [[Status LED#Error Condition|Error Condition]] You need a receiving FlexTT5 for each remote speedlight.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====My remote speedlights don’t change their zoom when I zoom the lens on my camera. What’s wrong?====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A: Zoom tracking is a feature for on-camera flash and would cause some lighting issues if done on remotes. Nikon and Canon native systems do not have zoom tracking for remote or slave flashes either.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====How can I trigger a FlexTT5 from a PocketWizard module-equipped Sekonic meter?====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A: This PW TV episode explains it all: &amp;lt;div align=center&amp;gt;&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;zOOq3sX6Ki4&amp;amp;autohide=1|425|240&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Note: We recommend using Basic Trigger Mode to set the Standard Channel, instead of the &amp;quot;Use ControlTL for Receive&amp;quot; checkbox mentioned in this video. Check Basic Trigger Mode under the Misc tab first, and then set your Standard Receive Channel under the Channels Tab. If using a Canon FlexTT5, you'll need to first uncheck Force TTL Master Mode.''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====What cable do I need?====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A: You can use the [http://www.pocketwizard.com/support/cable_finder/ Cable Finder] at PocketWizard.com to find the right cable for lots of different cameras and flashes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Can I combine radio and optical so I don’t have to buy as many FlexTT5s? Can I connect more than one speedlight to a single FlexTT5?====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A: Currently you need to have one FlexTT5 for each speedlight you want to control via radio.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Is “xxxxxxx” brand/model flash compatible with your radios?====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A: Some third party flashes are compatible with our radios – you can read more about our radios compatibility on their respective product pages ([[Canon_Compatibility|FlexTT5 for Canon]], [[Nikon_Compatibility|FlexTT5 for Nikon]]). Also, almost any flash can be used in [[Misc Tab#Basic Trigger|Basic Trigger Mode]] for simple triggering operation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Will you ever have ControlTL in a Sekonic meter?====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A: A module with the ControlTL channels is being developed. We do not have a release date for it at this time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Still have a question? Search this [[Main_Page|Wiki]], see a list of our [http://www.pocketwizard.com/support/repair/ worldwide distributors], or [http://www.pocketwizard.com/contact/inquiry/ contact us by email]!&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ian</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=Remote_Camera_Triggering&amp;diff=1063</id>
		<title>Remote Camera Triggering</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=Remote_Camera_Triggering&amp;diff=1063"/>
				<updated>2012-01-06T01:26:58Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ian: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{recommended reading|Learn Mode|}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:remotecamera.jpg|200px|thumb|right|1D Mark II, FlexTT5, and CM-N3-ACC cable]]&lt;br /&gt;
As with other PocketWizard radios, the MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 can be used to trigger a remote camera. A PocketWizard remote camera cable is required to perform this operation. Different camera bodies have different remote camera connectors and require different cables. To find the right cable for your particular camera, you can use the [http://www.pocketwizard.com/support/cable_finder/ Cable Finder].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the default settings, a remote camera can be triggered in single shot mode and there will be a delay between subsequent triggers until the camera's viewfinder LCD deactivates. Continuous triggering for motor drive bursts is possible if the FlexTT5 attached to the camera has either Disable Shoe Communications or [[Misc_Tab#Basic_Trigger|Basic Trigger Mode]] set via the PocketWizard Utility. It is not possible to combine continuous remote camera triggering with advanced features like TTL and FP/High Speed Sync. Relay Mode with TTL is only available in single shot mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Relay Mode==&lt;br /&gt;
A receiving FlexTT5 is automatically configured to use Relay Mode to trigger remote flashes in sync with the remote camera. To engage relay mode, simply set the FlexTT5s connected to remote flashes to one channel higher than you're using to trigger the camera. So if the FlexTT5 triggering the camera is receiving on ControlTL Channel 1, it will transmit on ControlTL Channel 2 to trigger flash in sync. You can specify the transmit and receive channels via the PocketWizard Utility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See more about Relay Mode in this PW TV episode:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;pHJ3_wajYlA&amp;amp;autoplay=0&amp;amp;autohide=1|425|240&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Remote Camera Cables==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Remote camera cables fall into three general categories, each with different applications and features.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Standard Cables''' - These cables have a mono miniphone connector on one end and a camera-specific remote connector on the other. They can be used with Plus IIs, MultiMAXes, and FlexTT5s set to Basic Trigger Mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Pre-release Cables''' - These cables have a mono miniphone connector on one end and a camera-specific remote connector on the other. They also have a pre-release switch built into the cable itself. When the switch is engaged, the connected camera behaves as if its shutter button is held down half way. This lets the camera respond more quickly and consistently, but at the expense of battery life. Pre-release cables can be used with Plus IIs, MultiMAXes, and FlexTT5s set to Basic Trigger Mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''ACC Cables''' - These cables have a stereo miniphone connector on one end and a camera-specific remote connector on the other. A camera can be remotely pre-released when connected via an ACC cable to a compatible Pocketwizard radio. They can be used with the ACC port on a MultiMAX or a FlexTT5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See more about remote camera cables in this PW TV episode:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;oQiuBVyMhKk&amp;amp;autoplay=0&amp;amp;autohide=1|425|240&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;float: left;&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=2|FlexTT5 + ACC Cable Compatibility Chart&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''FlexTT5 Configuration'''&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Supported Behaviors'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Receiving on a ControlTL Channel&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Attached to camera's hot shoe&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote camera triggering in single shot mode&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Relay Mode for Standard and ControlTL Channels&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Receiving on a ControlTL Channel&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Not in camera's hot shoe&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;color:red;&amp;quot; |Unsupported&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Remote camera cannot be triggered&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Receiving on a Standard Channel&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Attached to camera's hot shoe&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote camera triggering in single shot mode&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Relay Mode for Standard and ControlTL Channels&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Receiving on a Standard Channel&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Not in camera's hot shoe&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;color:red;&amp;quot; |Unsupported&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Remote camera cannot be triggered&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Receiving on a Standard Channel&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Basic Trigger Mode enabled&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Attached to camera's hot shoe&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote camera triggering in single shot or continuous modes&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Relay Mode for Standard Channels&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Receiving on a Standard Channel&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Basic Trigger Mode Enabled&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Not in camera's hot shoe&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote camera triggering in single shot or continuous modes&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Receiving on a ControlTL Channel&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Shoe Communications disabled&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Attached to camera's hot shoe&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote camera triggering in single shot or continuous modes&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Receiving on a ControlTL Channel&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Shoe Communications disabled&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Not in camera's hot shoe&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote camera triggering in single shot or continuous modes&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Receiving on a Standard Channel&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Shoe Communications disabled&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Attached to camera's hot shoe&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote camera triggering in single shot or continuous modes&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Receiving on a Standard Channel&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Shoe Communications disabled&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Not in camera's hot shoe&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote camera triggering in single shoe or continuous modes&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;float: left;&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=2|FlexTT5 + Standard and Pre-release Cable Compatibility Chart&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''FlexTT5 Configuration'''&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Supported Behaviors'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Receiving on a ControlTL Channel&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Attached to camera's hot shoe&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;color:red;&amp;quot; |Unsupported&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Remote camera cannot be triggered&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Receiving on a ControlTL Channel&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Not in camera's hot shoe&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;color:red;&amp;quot; |Unsupported&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Remote camera cannot be triggered&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Receiving on a Standard Channel&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Attached to camera's hot shoe&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;color:red;&amp;quot; |Unsupported&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Remote camera cannot be triggered&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Receiving on a Standard Channel&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Not in camera's hot shoe&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;color:red;&amp;quot; |Unsupported&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Remote camera cannot be triggered&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Receiving on a Standard Channel&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Basic Trigger Mode enabled&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Attached to camera's hot shoe&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote camera triggering in single shot or continuous modes&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Relay Mode for Standard Channels&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Receiving on a Standard Channel&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Basic Trigger Mode Enabled&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Not in camera's hot shoe&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote camera triggering in single shot or continuous modes&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Receiving on a ControlTL Channel&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Shoe Communications disabled&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Attached to camera's hot shoe&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote camera triggering in single shot or continuous modes&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Receiving on a ControlTL Channel&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Shoe Communications disabled&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Not in camera's hot shoe&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote camera triggering in single shot or continuous modes&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Receiving on a Standard Channel&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Shoe Communications disabled&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Attached to camera's hot shoe&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote camera triggering in single shot or continuous modes&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Receiving on a Standard Channel&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Shoe Communications disabled&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Not in camera's hot shoe&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote camera triggering in single shoe or continuous modes&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ian</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync&amp;diff=1062</id>
		<title>HyperSync</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync&amp;diff=1062"/>
				<updated>2011-12-21T17:24:01Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ian: /* PocketWizard Radio Receiving on a Standard Channel */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{recommended reading|High Speed Sync|}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section only talks about HyperSync. Read the section on [[Understanding HyperSync and High Speed Sync]] to learn more about the difference between HyperSync and High Speed Sync.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
HyperSync enables a PocketWizard connected flash to begin firing just *before* the camera triggers a sync pulse. Since you are &amp;quot;triggering faster than a wire&amp;quot; with HyperSync, you can sync at shutter speeds faster than X-sync for many cameras and get more usable flash energy before Auto FP (High Speed Sync) is activated. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When using transmitting and receiving ControlTL radios, HyperSync is adjusted separately on the transmitter and receiver. The on-camera MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 automatically adjusts HyperSync for the best performance and compensates for changes to shutter speed. The receiving ControlTL radio can additionally compensate for flash power level by making adjustments to achieve the fastest possible sync speed with supported configurations, such as a FlexTT5 with an [[AC9 AlienBees Adapter]], a [[PowerST4]], or a [[PowerMC2]]. Some configurations require adjustments via the PocketWizard Utility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All receiving PocketWizard radios, including the [[Plus II]], [[MultiMAX]], and [[Embedded Radios]] will trigger in sync with HyperSync.  HyperSync requires a MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 as a transmitter.  A Standard transmitter like a Plus II cannot trigger a remote FlexTT5 and achieve HyperSync.  This is because the MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 as transmitter actually sends out 2 signals every time it is triggered; one on a ControlTL Channel, and one on a Standard Channel channel. Read more about these different [[Channels]] here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
HyperSync can be customized on a per-flash basis. If you have Multiple flashes of different makes/models, you can now make HyperSync adjustments individually on each receiving FlexTT5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Configuring HyperSync ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using a transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 on your camera, follow the instructions below for your specific receiving PocketWizard radio and then take pictures normally.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Remote FlexTT5 with Speedlite in the Top Shoe ===&lt;br /&gt;
With the default settings, you can sync at any shutter speed. HyperSync Automation will be used only at 1/320th with Speedlites, after which the transmitting ControlTL radio will switch to using High Speed Sync isntead. On the transmitting radio, adjust the &amp;quot;HSS/FP Begins At (HyperSync Ends)&amp;quot; control under the [[HyperSync/HSS Tab]] to specify the shutter speed at which HyperSync timings are no logner used and High Speed Sync/FP Sync is engaged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Transmitter-side Automated HyperSync will be used at all shutter speeds faster than x-sync until High Speed Sync is engaged. Receiver-side HyperSync automation is not currently supported for Canon Speedlites, as they do not communicate their power level through the hot shoe. For full HyperSync Automation with Speedlites, their power levels must be controlled via a Speedlite in Master Mode or AC3 ZoneController at camera position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== FlexTT5 - Flash Connected to P2 Port ===&lt;br /&gt;
• On the receiving FlexTT5, select the “P2 HyperSync Flash Duration” dropdown menu under the [[HyperSync/HSS Tab]] and choose a duration to match the estimated flash duration of your strobe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Attach the transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 to your camera. Connect the receiving FlexTT5 to the flash and take pictures normally.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===[[AC9 AlienBees Adapter]]===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• On the receiving FlexTT5, select the flash connected to the AC9 AlienBees Adapter in the [[HyperSync/HSS Tab]] of the [[PocketWizard Utility]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Attach the transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 to your camera. Connect the receiving FlexTT5 and AC9 AlienBees Adapter to the flash and take pictures normally.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As of this firmware release, HyperSync Automation is currently implemented for the following Paul C. Buff flashes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;text-align:center;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|AlienBees AB400&lt;br /&gt;
|White Lightning X800&lt;br /&gt;
|Zeus 1250&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|AlienBees AB800&lt;br /&gt;
|White Lightning X1600&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|AlienBees AB1600&lt;br /&gt;
|White Lightning X3200&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|AlienBees ABR800 RingFlash&lt;br /&gt;
|White Lightning Ultra1200&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your flash is connected to an AC9 AlienBees adapter and is not in the list above, try selecting a flash of a similar power level.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===[[PowerMC2]]===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No configuration is necessary. Attach the transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 to your camera. Connect the receiving PowerMC2 to the flash and take pictures normally.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Note that the Einstein E640 Flash is an IGBT-controlled flash, and has an extremely short flash duration once set to anything less than full power. As such, the Einstein will see best HyperSync performance when used at full power.''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===[[PowerST4]]===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• If the receiving PocketWizard radio is a PowerST4 connected to a Ranger RX series or Digital 1200RX/2400RX pack, choose the Elinchom flash head in use under the [[PocketWizard Utility#Misc Tab|Misc Tab]] in the [[PocketWizard Utility]]. This control is set specifically on the receiving PowerST4. The Ranger S head will offer better HyperSync performance than the A head due to its longer flash duration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Attach the transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 to your camera. Connect the receiving PowerST4 to the flash and take pictures normally.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At present, HyperSync Automation is currently implemented for the following Elinchrom flashes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;text-align:center;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=3 |Elinchrom Flashes&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Style 300RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Digital 1200RX or Digital 2400RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Digital S Head&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Ranger S Head&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Style 600RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Digital 1200RX or Digital 2400RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Digital SE Head&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Ranger A Head&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Style 1200RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Digital 1200RX or Digital 2400RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Mini A Head&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX Speed&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Ranger S Head&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|Digital 1200RX or Digital 2400RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Mini S Head&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX Speed&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Ranger A Head&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|Digital 1200RX or Digital 2400RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with A3000 Head&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX Speed A/s&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Ranger S Head&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|Digital 1200RX or Digital 2400RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with A6000 Head&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX Speed A/s&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Ranger A Head&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your flash is connected to a PowerST4 and is not in the list above, set the remote ControlTL radio to receive on a Standard Channel and configure HyperSync using the HyperSync Transmitter Controls, as described below. Make sure to disable High Speed Sync from the transmitting radio.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== PocketWizard Radio Receiving on a Standard Channel ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
([[Plus II]], [[MultiMAX]], [[Misc_Tab#Basic_Trigger|FlexTT5 in Basic Trigger Mode]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the transmitting radio, adjust the HSS/FP Beings AT (HyperSync Ends) control under the [[HyperSync/HSS Tab]] to specify the shutter speed at which HyperSync Timings are no longer used and High Speed Sync is engaged. Alternatively, [[High Speed Sync]] can be disabled entirely via the [[HyperSync/HSS Tab#HyperSync Only (Disably HSS/FP)|HyperSync Only]] checkbox.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To use HyperSync at any shutter speed above your camera's x-sync speed, and never transition to High Speed Sync, check the “HyperSync Only (Disable HSS/FP)” box, also under the [[HyperSync/HSS Tab]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Triggers on Standard Channels will only be sent at shutter speeds where High Speed Sync is disabled. Transmitter-side Automated HyperSync will be used at all shutter speed faster than x-sync until High Speed Sync is engaged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• For the transmitting ControlTL radio, select the “Flash Duration Selection” dropdown menu under the Sync Timing tab and choose a duration to match the estimated flash duration of your strobe. See the [[HyperSync/HSS_Tab#HyperSync_Flash_Duration_For_Standard_Channels_1_(FAST)_to_10_(SLOW)|HyperSync Flash Duration For Standard Channels]] section for more information on tailoring HyperSync timings for your specific Standard Channel remote.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ian</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync&amp;diff=1061</id>
		<title>HyperSync</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync&amp;diff=1061"/>
				<updated>2011-12-21T17:23:34Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ian: /* PocketWizard Radio Receiving on a Standard Channel */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{recommended reading|High Speed Sync|}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section only talks about HyperSync. Read the section on [[Understanding HyperSync and High Speed Sync]] to learn more about the difference between HyperSync and High Speed Sync.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
HyperSync enables a PocketWizard connected flash to begin firing just *before* the camera triggers a sync pulse. Since you are &amp;quot;triggering faster than a wire&amp;quot; with HyperSync, you can sync at shutter speeds faster than X-sync for many cameras and get more usable flash energy before Auto FP (High Speed Sync) is activated. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When using transmitting and receiving ControlTL radios, HyperSync is adjusted separately on the transmitter and receiver. The on-camera MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 automatically adjusts HyperSync for the best performance and compensates for changes to shutter speed. The receiving ControlTL radio can additionally compensate for flash power level by making adjustments to achieve the fastest possible sync speed with supported configurations, such as a FlexTT5 with an [[AC9 AlienBees Adapter]], a [[PowerST4]], or a [[PowerMC2]]. Some configurations require adjustments via the PocketWizard Utility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All receiving PocketWizard radios, including the [[Plus II]], [[MultiMAX]], and [[Embedded Radios]] will trigger in sync with HyperSync.  HyperSync requires a MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 as a transmitter.  A Standard transmitter like a Plus II cannot trigger a remote FlexTT5 and achieve HyperSync.  This is because the MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 as transmitter actually sends out 2 signals every time it is triggered; one on a ControlTL Channel, and one on a Standard Channel channel. Read more about these different [[Channels]] here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
HyperSync can be customized on a per-flash basis. If you have Multiple flashes of different makes/models, you can now make HyperSync adjustments individually on each receiving FlexTT5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Configuring HyperSync ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using a transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 on your camera, follow the instructions below for your specific receiving PocketWizard radio and then take pictures normally.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Remote FlexTT5 with Speedlite in the Top Shoe ===&lt;br /&gt;
With the default settings, you can sync at any shutter speed. HyperSync Automation will be used only at 1/320th with Speedlites, after which the transmitting ControlTL radio will switch to using High Speed Sync isntead. On the transmitting radio, adjust the &amp;quot;HSS/FP Begins At (HyperSync Ends)&amp;quot; control under the [[HyperSync/HSS Tab]] to specify the shutter speed at which HyperSync timings are no logner used and High Speed Sync/FP Sync is engaged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Transmitter-side Automated HyperSync will be used at all shutter speeds faster than x-sync until High Speed Sync is engaged. Receiver-side HyperSync automation is not currently supported for Canon Speedlites, as they do not communicate their power level through the hot shoe. For full HyperSync Automation with Speedlites, their power levels must be controlled via a Speedlite in Master Mode or AC3 ZoneController at camera position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== FlexTT5 - Flash Connected to P2 Port ===&lt;br /&gt;
• On the receiving FlexTT5, select the “P2 HyperSync Flash Duration” dropdown menu under the [[HyperSync/HSS Tab]] and choose a duration to match the estimated flash duration of your strobe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Attach the transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 to your camera. Connect the receiving FlexTT5 to the flash and take pictures normally.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===[[AC9 AlienBees Adapter]]===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• On the receiving FlexTT5, select the flash connected to the AC9 AlienBees Adapter in the [[HyperSync/HSS Tab]] of the [[PocketWizard Utility]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Attach the transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 to your camera. Connect the receiving FlexTT5 and AC9 AlienBees Adapter to the flash and take pictures normally.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As of this firmware release, HyperSync Automation is currently implemented for the following Paul C. Buff flashes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;text-align:center;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|AlienBees AB400&lt;br /&gt;
|White Lightning X800&lt;br /&gt;
|Zeus 1250&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|AlienBees AB800&lt;br /&gt;
|White Lightning X1600&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|AlienBees AB1600&lt;br /&gt;
|White Lightning X3200&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|AlienBees ABR800 RingFlash&lt;br /&gt;
|White Lightning Ultra1200&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your flash is connected to an AC9 AlienBees adapter and is not in the list above, try selecting a flash of a similar power level.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===[[PowerMC2]]===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No configuration is necessary. Attach the transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 to your camera. Connect the receiving PowerMC2 to the flash and take pictures normally.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Note that the Einstein E640 Flash is an IGBT-controlled flash, and has an extremely short flash duration once set to anything less than full power. As such, the Einstein will see best HyperSync performance when used at full power.''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===[[PowerST4]]===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• If the receiving PocketWizard radio is a PowerST4 connected to a Ranger RX series or Digital 1200RX/2400RX pack, choose the Elinchom flash head in use under the [[PocketWizard Utility#Misc Tab|Misc Tab]] in the [[PocketWizard Utility]]. This control is set specifically on the receiving PowerST4. The Ranger S head will offer better HyperSync performance than the A head due to its longer flash duration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Attach the transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 to your camera. Connect the receiving PowerST4 to the flash and take pictures normally.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At present, HyperSync Automation is currently implemented for the following Elinchrom flashes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;text-align:center;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=3 |Elinchrom Flashes&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Style 300RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Digital 1200RX or Digital 2400RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Digital S Head&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Ranger S Head&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Style 600RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Digital 1200RX or Digital 2400RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Digital SE Head&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Ranger A Head&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Style 1200RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Digital 1200RX or Digital 2400RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Mini A Head&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX Speed&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Ranger S Head&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|Digital 1200RX or Digital 2400RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Mini S Head&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX Speed&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Ranger A Head&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|Digital 1200RX or Digital 2400RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with A3000 Head&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX Speed A/s&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Ranger S Head&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|Digital 1200RX or Digital 2400RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with A6000 Head&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX Speed A/s&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Ranger A Head&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your flash is connected to a PowerST4 and is not in the list above, set the remote ControlTL radio to receive on a Standard Channel and configure HyperSync using the HyperSync Transmitter Controls, as described below. Make sure to disable High Speed Sync from the transmitting radio.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== PocketWizard Radio Receiving on a Standard Channel ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
([[Plus II]], [[MultiMAX]], [[Misc_Tab#Basic_Trigger|FlexTT5 in Basic Trigger Mode]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the transmitting radio, adjust the HSS/FP Beings AT (HyperSync Ends) control under the [[HyperSync/HSS_Tab]] to specify the shutter speed at which HyperSync Timings are no longer used and High Speed Sync is engaged. Alternatively, [[High Speed Sync]] can be disabled entirely via the [[HyperSync/HSS Tab#HyperSync Only (Disably HSS/FP)|HyperSync Only]] checkbox.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To use HyperSync at any shutter speed above your camera's x-sync speed, and never transition to High Speed Sync, check the “HyperSync Only (Disable HSS/FP)” box, also under the [[HyperSync/HSS Tab]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Triggers on Standard Channels will only be sent at shutter speeds where High Speed Sync is disabled. Transmitter-side Automated HyperSync will be used at all shutter speed faster than x-sync until High Speed Sync is engaged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• For the transmitting ControlTL radio, select the “Flash Duration Selection” dropdown menu under the Sync Timing tab and choose a duration to match the estimated flash duration of your strobe. See the [[HyperSync/HSS_Tab#HyperSync_Flash_Duration_For_Standard_Channels_1_(FAST)_to_10_(SLOW)|HyperSync Flash Duration For Standard Channels]] section for more information on tailoring HyperSync timings for your specific Standard Channel remote.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ian</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=Rear_Curtain_Sync&amp;diff=1058</id>
		<title>Rear Curtain Sync</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=Rear_Curtain_Sync&amp;diff=1058"/>
				<updated>2011-10-31T19:16:12Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ian: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
====Canon====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We’ve added Optimized Rear Curtain Sync capabilities with the ability for you to set the shutter speed at which rear curtain sync is engaged. The default setting is set at 1/100 second so any time you are at that shutter speed or slower, rear curtain sync will be engaged. You can adjust this setting (or turn it off) in the [[PocketWizard Utility]] under the [[Flash Tab#Rear Curtain Sync Begins At: (Canon Only)|Flash Tab]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We found in testing that the Canon system rear curtain sync timing is actually not at the precise end of the shutter opening, but actually slightly before (Fig 1). We have been able to improve on this timing to put the flash at the very end of the exposure (Fig 2).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:735rcsynccanonweb2.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:735rcsynpwweb2.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Fig 1: Rear Curtain Sync using&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Canon’stechnology. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Note: streak below golf ball.&lt;br /&gt;
*Camera: 7D&lt;br /&gt;
*Shutter Speed: 1/10th&lt;br /&gt;
*Aperture: f/5.6&lt;br /&gt;
*Lens: EF 50mm f/2.5 Macro&lt;br /&gt;
|Fig 2: Rear Curtain Sync using&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;PocketWizard’s technology.&lt;br /&gt;
*Camera: 7D&lt;br /&gt;
*Shutter Speed: 1/10th&lt;br /&gt;
*Aperture: f/5.6&lt;br /&gt;
*Lens: EF 50mm f/2.5 Macro&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You do not need to set anything on your flashes including Canon’s own Second-Curtain Sync button.  Toggling the setting on the flash will not change the setting in the radio.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Nikon====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rear Curtain Sync in the Nikon system is simply controlled by the on-camera setting. When using a ControlTL capable radio, this setting is respected for enabling and disabling Rear Curtain Sync. With a Nikon camera, the Rear Curtain Sync setting can be left enabled at any shutter speed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, the Rear Curtain Sync functionality actually begins at 1/125th, and is used at all slower shutter speeds when enabled. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Refer to your [http://support.nikonusa.com/app/answers/detail/a_id/13948#Anchor-9 camera's manual] for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Important Note====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When using a MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 radio, the longest supported Rear Curtain Sync shutter speed is 8 seconds. Rear Curtain Sync exposures longer than this will not sync properly.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ian</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync&amp;diff=1048</id>
		<title>HyperSync</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync&amp;diff=1048"/>
				<updated>2011-10-17T17:44:43Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ian: /* PocketWizard Radio Receiving on a Standard Channel */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{recommended reading|High Speed Sync|}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section only talks about HyperSync. Read the section on [[Understanding HyperSync and High Speed Sync]] to learn more about the difference between HyperSync and High Speed Sync.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
HyperSync enables a PocketWizard connected flash to begin firing just *before* the camera triggers a sync pulse. Since you are &amp;quot;triggering faster than a wire&amp;quot; with HyperSync, you can sync at shutter speeds faster than X-sync for many cameras and get more usable flash energy before Auto FP (High Speed Sync) is activated. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When using transmitting and receiving ControlTL radios, HyperSync is adjusted separately on the transmitter and receiver. The on-camera MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 automatically adjusts HyperSync for the best performance and compensates for changes to shutter speed. The receiving ControlTL radio can additionally compensate for flash power level by making adjustments to achieve the fastest possible sync speed with supported configurations, such as a FlexTT5 with an [[AC9 AlienBees Adapter]], a [[PowerST4]], or a [[PowerMC2]]. Some configurations require adjustments via the PocketWizard Utility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All receiving PocketWizard radios, including the [[Plus II]], [[MultiMAX]], and [[Embedded Radios]] will trigger in sync with HyperSync.  HyperSync requires a MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 as a transmitter.  A Standard transmitter like a Plus II cannot trigger a remote FlexTT5 and achieve HyperSync.  This is because the MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 as transmitter actually sends out 2 signals every time it is triggered; one on a ControlTL Channel, and one on a Standard Channel channel. Read more about these different [[Channels]] here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
HyperSync can be customized on a per-flash basis. If you have Multiple flashes of different makes/models, you can now make HyperSync adjustments individually on each receiving FlexTT5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Configuring HyperSync ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using a transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 on your camera, follow the instructions below for your specific receiving PocketWizard radio and then take pictures normally.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Remote FlexTT5 with Speedlite in the Top Shoe ===&lt;br /&gt;
With the default settings, you can sync at any shutter speed. HyperSync Automation will be used only at 1/320th with Speedlites, after which the transmitting ControlTL radio will switch to using High Speed Sync isntead. On the transmitting radio, adjust the &amp;quot;HSS/FP Begins At (HyperSync Ends)&amp;quot; control under the [[HyperSync/HSS Tab]] to specify the shutter speed at which HyperSync timings are no logner used and High Speed Sync/FP Sync is engaged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Transmitter-side Automated HyperSync will be used at all shutter speeds faster than x-sync until High Speed Sync is engaged. Receiver-side HyperSync automation is not currently supported for Canon Speedlites, as they do not communicate their power level through the hot shoe. For full HyperSync Automation with Speedlites, their power levels must be controlled via a Speedlite in Master Mode or AC3 ZoneController at camera position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== FlexTT5 - Flash Connected to P2 Port ===&lt;br /&gt;
• On the receiving FlexTT5, select the “P2 HyperSync Flash Duration” dropdown menu under the [[HyperSync/HSS Tab]] and choose a duration to match the estimated flash duration of your strobe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Attach the transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 to your camera. Connect the receiving FlexTT5 to the flash and take pictures normally.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===[[AC9 AlienBees Adapter]]===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• On the receiving FlexTT5, select the flash connected to the AC9 AlienBees Adapter in the [[HyperSync/HSS Tab]] of the [[PocketWizard Utility]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Attach the transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 to your camera. Connect the receiving FlexTT5 and AC9 AlienBees Adapter to the flash and take pictures normally.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As of this firmware release, HyperSync Automation is currently implemented for the following Paul C. Buff flashes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;text-align:center;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|AlienBees AB400&lt;br /&gt;
|White Lightning X800&lt;br /&gt;
|Zeus 1250&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|AlienBees AB800&lt;br /&gt;
|White Lightning X1600&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|AlienBees AB1600&lt;br /&gt;
|White Lightning X3200&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|AlienBees ABR800 RingFlash&lt;br /&gt;
|White Lightning Ultra1200&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your flash is connected to an AC9 AlienBees adapter and is not in the list above, try selecting a flash of a similar power level.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===[[PowerMC2]]===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No configuration is necessary. Attach the transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 to your camera. Connect the receiving PowerMC2 to the flash and take pictures normally.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Note that the Einstein E640 Flash is an IGBT-controlled flash, and has an extremely short flash duration once set to anything less than full power. As such, the Einstein will see best HyperSync performance when used at full power.''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===[[PowerST4]]===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• If the receiving PocketWizard radio is a PowerST4 connected to a Ranger RX series or Digital 1200RX/2400RX pack, choose the Elinchom flash head in use under the [[PocketWizard Utility#Misc Tab|Misc Tab]] in the [[PocketWizard Utility]]. This control is set specifically on the receiving PowerST4. The Ranger S head will offer better HyperSync performance than the A head due to its longer flash duration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Attach the transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 to your camera. Connect the receiving PowerST4 to the flash and take pictures normally.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At present, HyperSync Automation is currently implemented for the following Elinchrom flashes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;text-align:center;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=3 |Elinchrom Flashes&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Style 300RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Digital 1200RX or Digital 2400RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Digital S Head&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Ranger S Head&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Style 600RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Digital 1200RX or Digital 2400RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Digital SE Head&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Ranger A Head&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Style 1200RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Digital 1200RX or Digital 2400RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Mini A Head&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX Speed&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Ranger S Head&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|Digital 1200RX or Digital 2400RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Mini S Head&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX Speed&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Ranger A Head&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|Digital 1200RX or Digital 2400RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with A3000 Head&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX Speed A/s&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Ranger S Head&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|Digital 1200RX or Digital 2400RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with A6000 Head&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX Speed A/s&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Ranger A Head&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your flash is connected to a PowerST4 and is not in the list above, set the remote ControlTL radio to receive on a Standard Channel and configure HyperSync using the HyperSync Transmitter Controls, as described below. Make sure to disable High Speed Sync from the transmitting radio.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== PocketWizard Radio Receiving on a Standard Channel ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
([[Plus II]], [[MultiMAX]], [[Misc_Tab#Basic_Trigger|FlexTT5 in Basic Trigger Mode]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the transmitting radio, adjust the HSS/FP Beings AT (HyperSync Ends) control under the [[HyperSync/HSS tab]] to specify the shutter speed at which HyperSync Timings are no longer used and High Speed Sync is engaged. Alternatively, [[High Speed Sync]] can be disabled entirely via the [[HyperSync/HSS Tab#HyperSync Only (Disably HSS/FP)|HyperSync Only]] checkbox.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To use HyperSync at any shutter speed above your camera's x-sync speed, and never transition to High Speed Sync, check the “HyperSync Only (Disable HSS/FP)” box, also under the [[HyperSync/HSS Tab]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Triggers on Standard Channels will only be sent at shutter speeds where High Speed Sync is disabled. Transmitter-side Automated HyperSync will be used at all shutter speed faster than x-sync until High Speed Sync is engaged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• For the transmitting ControlTL radio, select the “Flash Duration Selection” dropdown menu under the Sync Timing tab and choose a duration to match the estimated flash duration of your strobe. See the [[HyperSync/HSS_Tab#HyperSync_Flash_Duration_For_Standard_Channels_1_(FAST)_to_10_(SLOW)|HyperSync Flash Duration For Standard Channels]] section for more information on tailoring HyperSync timings for your specific Standard Channel remote.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ian</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=Understanding_HyperSync_and_High_Speed_Sync&amp;diff=1022</id>
		<title>Understanding HyperSync and High Speed Sync</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=Understanding_HyperSync_and_High_Speed_Sync&amp;diff=1022"/>
				<updated>2011-09-21T13:51:48Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ian: /* HyperSync */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{recommended reading|HyperSync|}}&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section discusses HyperSync and High Speed Sync at a basic level.  Read the [[HyperSync]] section for more detailed information on how to adjust HyperSync for your configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
HyperSync and High Speed Sync both allow flash triggering with a camera at shutter speeds faster than X-sync.  They function differently, however, and it is important to understand how X-Sync and High Speed Sync work to understand what is happening with HyperSync.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== X-Sync ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== A flash directly connected to a camera ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
X-Sync is typically the fastest shutter speed at which your camera can trigger a flash.   A camera triggering a flash at X-sync follows this time-line:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#The camera is triggered by the photographer.  Several milliseconds of [[Lag Time]] pass.&lt;br /&gt;
#The first shutter opens, exposing the digital sensor.  Some microseconds of time pass.  This shutter will stay open for several milliseconds when the camera is set to X-Sync.&lt;br /&gt;
#The camera triggers its PC terminal and hot shoe.&lt;br /&gt;
#Some microseconds of time pass, then the flash begins to emit light.&lt;br /&gt;
#The flash emits light for its [[Flash Duration]].  This can be any amount of time up to a few milliseconds.&lt;br /&gt;
#The second shutter in the camera closes and both shutters reset.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Shutter speeds faster than X-Sync typically have the first and second shutters moving at the same time, or with no delay between the first shutter fully opening and the second shutter beginning to close.  This does not work with normal flash triggering because the second shutter can be moving when the flash is generating light which yields a clipped exposure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your flash has a very long duration, or your shutter is very slow moving, you can get clipping even at X-sync.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== A flash triggered remotely by a standard radio slave ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adding a standard radio slave to the above time line adds additional microseconds between steps 3 and 4.  This additional delay moves the flash triggering moment towards the time when the second shutter will be moving.  If your flash has a very long duration, or your shutter is very slow moving, you can get clipping when using a standard radio slave even at X-sync.  You may have to use a slower shutter speed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== [[High Speed Sync]] ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
High Speed Sync (HSS), also known as Auto FP Sync, allows for triggering at shutter speeds faster than X-Sync.   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;FP&amp;quot; stands for &amp;quot;Focal Plane.&amp;quot;  When the first shutter starts to open, it is exposing the digital sensor, which is the Focal Plane.  FP Sync means triggering the flash just before the focal plane is exposed rather than waiting until shutter is fully open.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
HSS uses a pulsed light technique that generates continuous light from before the first shutter begins to move until after the second shutter closes.  At faster shutter speeds, both the first and second shutters are moving simultaneously, creating a moving slit across the digital sensor.   Since the light appears continuous to the digital sensor, there is no clipping even at the fastest shutter speeds.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
HSS requires a special flash like a Speedlite/Speedlight that can do the pulsed light technique.  It also requires special timing information from the camera called '''pre-sync''' that is communicated through the TTL pins of a camera's hot shoe.   A normal studio flash or standard non-TTL flash cannot perform the light pulse technique, nor does it have the electrical connections required to use the pre-sync information from the camera's TTL hot shoe pins.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An HSS time line would look like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#The camera is triggered by the photographer.  Several milliseconds of [[Lag Time]] pass.&lt;br /&gt;
#Just before the first shutter would open, '''pre-sync''' occurs.  This tells the Speedlight when to begin generating pulsed light as ...&lt;br /&gt;
#The first shutter opens, exposing the digital sensor while the flash continuously pulses throughout the exposure.&lt;br /&gt;
#Shortly after the first shutter moves, the second shutter begins to move.  The pulsed light continues.&lt;br /&gt;
#The second shutter in the camera closes and both shutters reset.  The flash stops pulsing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pulsed light technique cannot emit as much light as a normal flash pulse as it uses a lot of energy to make the light continuous.  This means that your flash must be much closer to the subject to be effective.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== [[HyperSync]] ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A normal flash is much more efficient at delivering light to a subject than an HSS or pulsed flash method.  You can have your flash farther from a subject, or deliver more light to the scene when using a normal flash.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
HyperSync uses the '''pre-sync''' information available in the TTL shoe pins to trigger a normal flash ''before'' X-Sync would occur.  It does this by knowing how much time passes from pre-sync until X-sync.  It can also eliminate the delay introduced by a radio slave.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
HyperSync requires a ControlTL transmitter like the [[Nikon MiniTT1 and FlexTT5]] or [[Canon MiniTT1 and FlexTT5]].  All HyperSync adjustments are made in the [[PocketWizard Utility]] on the [[HyperSync/HSS Tab]].  Any PocketWizard radio can be used as a receiver and be triggered from the ControlTL transmitter's HyperSync timing.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two methods of using HyperSync to get flash sync at faster than X-Sync shutter speeds, '''peak''' and '''tail'''.  Most flashes generate a tall peak of light when first triggered, then that light fades down to a long tail.  When adjusting the [[HyperSync]] slider you can optimize your HyperSync moment for the peak or for the tail with different results.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Using the Peak ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The '''peak''' method uses the brightest peak of light generated by the flash.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Look at the X-Sync time line above.  Steps 2 and 4 have some wasted time.  Optimizing HyperSync to use the peak capitalizes on this wasted time.  Moving the peak of light to a little bit before X-Sync can save enough time that you can use a shutter speed faster than X-Sync.  As long as the second curtain is not yet moving when the flash is generating its peak of light, you will not get clipping.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Optimizing for the peak is effective for shutter speeds just faster than X-Sync, but not for the fastest shutter speeds of 1/640 and faster.  Some camera and flash combinations can achieve up to 1/500 using this method, some only 1/250, before they encounter clipping at faster shutter speeds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When adjusting HyperSync to work with the peak, you would be working with numbers closer to 0 (zero) on the HyperSync slider because you are only moving the peak of light a little way from X-Sync.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You need either:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*a very short peak flash duration so that the peak of light is finished before the second curtain begins to move.&lt;br /&gt;
*a very long peak flash duration so that the peak of light isn't changing when the second curtain is moving.  It is not likely to find a flash with this kind of duration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are using Speedlites as your flash source, you can optimize HyperSync for the shutter speeds just faster than X-Sync, then use the ControlTL system to switch over automatically to use HSS at shutter speeds where a normal flash would start to show clipping in the frame.  See the [[Sync Timing Tab]] section in the [[PocketWizard Utility]] for information on setting &amp;quot;High Speed Sync (HSS/FP) Begins At:&amp;quot; for your ControlTL transmitter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Using the Tail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The '''tail''' method uses the long tail of light generated after the peak is finished in a standard flash.  This long tail is seen as continuous light for a shutter speed faster than X-Sync.  Optimizing for the tail can often work for the fastest shutter speeds all the way up to 1/8000.  This method delivers much less light to the camera's sensor than using the peak, but depending on your studio flash in use it can be substantially more than what is delivered by a Speedlight in HSS mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To use this method of HyperSync, you need to disable HSS in your ControlTL transmitter.  See the [[Sync Timing Tab]] section in the [[PocketWizard Utility]] for information on setting &amp;quot;High Speed Sync (HSS/FP) Disable Mode.&amp;quot;   If you do not check this box for your transmitter, then you will not be able to trigger your remote studio flash at shutter speeds faster than &amp;quot;High Speed Sync (HSS/FP) Begins At:.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You optimize for the tail by adjusting the HyperSync slider to the left (more negative).  This moves the peak of light such that it is completed before the first shutter starts to open.  Then the flash will only be generating the long tail of light while the shutters are open.  Depending on your flash's duration, it may be difficult to optimize for the shutter speeds closest to X-Sync as those require the longest flash duration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This method is only effective with studio flash.  Speedlites do not generate enough light during the tail to be more effective than using HSS would be.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Factors to consider ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Read the [[HyperSync]] section for more detailed information on how to adjust HyperSync.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are many factors that affect the success of HyperSync.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Flash duration is a critical factor.  Flash duration often changes with power level.  When you are fine-tuning HyperSync, make sure to test across the flash power levels you intend to use so you can see if certain flash durations will cause clipping at any shutter speed you intend to use.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are many factors in a camera that affect HyperSync.  Slower larger shutter blades will make HyperSync less likely to work near X-Sync with peak flash.  Faster shutter blades, smaller sensors, or crop mode can often improve HyperSync success.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A large sensor and fast shutter blade camera like a Canon 1D Mark III may be able to get peak HyperSync at faster shutter speeds like 1/500.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A large sensor, but slow shutter blade camera like the Canon 5D Mark II may only be able to get 1/320 before HSS must be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A small sensor camera like a Canon 50D may be able to get 1/400, even though it has a slower shutter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Triggering a studio flash from the HSS trigger moment ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your FlexTT5 is set to receive on a ControlTL channel, you can trigger a remote studio flash connected to the P2 port right at the HSS trigger moment.  This may yield an effect similar to using HyperSync optimized for the tail, but it is not true HyperSync because you can not fine tune the trigger moment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
==See the [[HyperSync]] page for more information==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ian</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=Batteries&amp;diff=1018</id>
		<title>Batteries</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=Batteries&amp;diff=1018"/>
				<updated>2011-09-16T14:44:43Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ian: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{recommended reading|Status LED|}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some PocketWizard radios require batteries.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''CAUTION'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Turn OFF your equipment (PocketWizard units, electronic flash units, cameras, etc.) before making connections or changing batteries.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== FlexTT5, Canon or Nikon ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:FlexTT5 Battery Polarity.jpg|thumb|300px|Note proper polarity]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Install 2 fresh AA (IEC:LR6) batteries into the FlexTT5 Transceiver. Make sure to note proper polarity. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alkaline batteries are recommended. Rechargeable or other chemistry batteries will also work, though life expectancy may vary.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Life expectancy = approximately 60 hours with alkaline batteries.&lt;br /&gt;
{{clear}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== MiniTT1, Canon or Nikon ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MiniTT1_Battery_Polarity.jpg|thumb|300px|Note proper polarity]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The MiniTT1 saves batteries by automatically entering an extremely low power state when the camera enters sleep mode, or if not on a camera and TEST is not pressed for 10 seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Install a fresh CR2450 coin cell battery into the MiniTT1 Transmitter. Make sure to note proper polarity.  When the battery is in the radio, you should be able to see the + sign.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Life expectancy varies based on usage profile, as well as camera and flash models.  When using a CR2450:&lt;br /&gt;
* Canon MiniTT1  = 100’s of hours/thousands of triggers&lt;br /&gt;
* Nikon MiniTT1  = approximately 30 hours of camera awake time&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Basic Trigger Mode]] consumes the coin cell battery more quickly and is not recommended when using the MiniTT1 for Nikon on a Nikon camera, or when using the MiniTT1 for Canon on a Canon camera.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Low temperature can significantly affect coin cell performance. Always use fresh batteries in cold temperatures. Make sure to read the [[Safety Warnings]] about temperature.&lt;br /&gt;
{{clear}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 Status LED ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;float: right;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;mF-QD999nDY&amp;amp;loop=1&amp;amp;autoplay=1|225|155&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Look at the normal [[Status LED]] blink to determine battery level, or use the PocketWizard Utility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;LED Blink:                                                  &lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:green;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Green&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; = Good battery&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Amber&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; = Warning – battery low&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Red&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; = Very low battery – change immediately&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 Battery Meter in the PocketWizard Utility ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To see your battery level in the PocketWizard Utility, make sure your MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 are turned on (set to C.1 or C.2) before you connect the USB cable.  Hover your mouse cursor over the battery icon to get an exact voltage and battery status.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Storage ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For all PocketWizard products,the storage temperature range, without batteries, is above -30° C (-22° F) and below 85° C (185° F).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Always remove batteries during storage.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Battery Warnings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
WARNING – To avoid battery leakage, follow these guidelines:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Always remove the batteries when the unit is not in use for extended periods of time, or during shipping or long distance travel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Never mix old and new batteries. Always use a fresh pair of matched batteries.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Always change batteries promptly at the first indication of low battery operation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Do not use or leave the unit in extreme temperature or humid environments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:MiniTT1 and FlexTT5|1]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ian</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=Getting_Started&amp;diff=1006</id>
		<title>Getting Started</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=Getting_Started&amp;diff=1006"/>
				<updated>2011-09-13T19:30:05Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ian: /* Powering On */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{recommended reading|Batteries|}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Before You Begin ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this is the first time you are using a remote [[TTL]] flash system, we recommend you consult your camera and flash manuals for the basics of positioning your flash units.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Review the owner’s manuals for your camera and flash system. For most basic functions when using Canon or Nikon’s system with PocketWizard's, operation is identical. Important exceptions will be noted in this wiki.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Turn Everything OFF ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All equipment should be turned OFF when making connections.  If not, unwanted triggering may occur when inserting or removing a flash or connecting a camera cable.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Turn OFF your PocketWizard radios, electronic flash units, cameras, etc., before changing batteries in the flashes, cameras, or radios.'''  See the [[Batteries]] section for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ControlTL radios use information presented by the camera and flash when the camera wakes up.  If you do not power off your gear when making changes to your equipment, like adding a flash or accessory to the top shoe or changing the camera body in use, then this information is missed and the radios may not perform properly.  If you do not power off the equipment, try letting your camera enter a sleep cycle when making equipment changes: wait for the meters to turn off in the viewfinder (entering sleep), then half-press the shutter to exit sleep.  This may restore proper operation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== First Shot ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The first exposure after making initial connections or powering on may not be properly exposed. The first shot is a camera calibration shot for Canon radios. '''Always test fire at least twice!'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Transmitters ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may use a FlexTT5 as a transmitter instead of a MiniTT1 in all scenarios.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Channels ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make sure all PocketWizard radios are set to the same PocketWizard channels. The PocketWizard channel is used instead of Nikon or Canon’s communication channel.  See the [[Channels]] section for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Don't use REMOTE or SLAVE mode ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Always set your remote TTL flashes to standard i-TTL/E-TTL mode.  Do not use MASTER, REMOTE, or SLAVE modes on your remote flashes.  The ControlTL system talks to your flash via the hot shoe and SLAVE/REMOTE modes do not communicate through the shoe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Canon''' flashes set to &amp;lt;SLAVE&amp;gt; and connected to FlexTT5 radios will have slave mode automatically turned off, but will still function as slaves correctly. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Nikon''' flashes set to REMOTE and connected to FlexTT5 will not function as remotes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Set the remote/slave group A, B, or C, via the FlexTT5 Zone Switch.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Powering On ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Turn OFF all your PocketWizard radios, electronic flashes, cameras, etc., before making connections.&lt;br /&gt;
#When all equipment is connected, turn ON your equipment starting from the top and working your way down. &lt;br /&gt;
##Turn on your flash first&lt;br /&gt;
##Next, turn on the PocketWizard radio by setting the power switch to C.1 or C.2.  Verify [[Status LED]] blinks normally (short blink every 2 seconds)&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;(see the [[PocketWizard Utility]] for more information on C.1 and C.2)&lt;br /&gt;
##Turn on your camera last (if using radio/flash on-camera)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The first exposure after making initial connections and powering on may not be properly exposed. The first shot is a camera calibration shot for Canon. Always test at least twice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NOTE: With Canon radios, a few flash adjustments may not be available when the flash is in the shoe of a powered on MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 and sitting on an active camera. For example, you cannot take a 580EX II out of &amp;lt;MASTER&amp;gt; mode if the flash is in the hot shoe of a powered on remote FlexTT5. Turn the MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 off and wait for the camera to sleep, or remove the flash from the shoe to access these special mode changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:MiniTT1 and FlexTT5|1]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ian</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=Canon_Compatibility&amp;diff=1004</id>
		<title>Canon Compatibility</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=Canon_Compatibility&amp;diff=1004"/>
				<updated>2011-09-13T19:22:17Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ian: /* 5D 1/8000th in Av mode */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This section contains compatibility information for the Canon [[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5]] ControlTL radios.{{recommended reading|PocketWizard Utility|}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Camera Compatibility ==&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 for Canon are compatible with these modern Canon digital cameras capable of using Canon's latest E-TTL II protocol:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=1 style=&amp;quot;text-align:center&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|1Ds Mark III&lt;br /&gt;
|1D Mark IV&lt;br /&gt;
|7D&lt;br /&gt;
|60D&lt;br /&gt;
|Rebel T3i / 600D&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1Ds Mark II&lt;br /&gt;
|1D Mark III&lt;br /&gt;
|5D Mark II&lt;br /&gt;
|50D&lt;br /&gt;
|Rebel T3 / 1100D&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|1D Mark II N&lt;br /&gt;
|5D&lt;br /&gt;
|40D&lt;br /&gt;
|Rebel T2i/550D&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|1D Mark II&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|30D&lt;br /&gt;
|Rebel T1i/500D&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|20D&lt;br /&gt;
|Rebel XSi/450D&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|Rebel XTi/400D&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|Rebel XT/350D&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|Rebel XS/1000D&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For optimal performance, it is highly recommended to specify your camera model in the [[Misc Tab#Camera Model (Canon Only)|Misc Tab]] of the [[PocketWizard Utility]] for your transmitting radio.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Misc Tab|BASIC TRIGGER MODE]]: Almost all cameras and flashes are compatible with the MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 when the radios are configured for Basic Trigger Mode.  Basic Trigger Mode disables all flash power control and TTL functions of the radios.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Canon's PowerShot cameras, such as the G9, G10, G11, G12 and earlier models, are not supported with our radios. Although these cameras can use many of the same flashes as modern Canon DSLRs, they use a very different implementation of Canon's ETTL II protocol.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Speedlite Compatibility ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Special Note:'''  Canon Speedlite models 580EX and 580EX II, and especially the older 430EX (not the newer 430EX II), emit RF interference that can substantially reduce the effective operating range of many radio slaves, including the FlexTT5 when used as a receiver. For these model flashes, please utilize the mounting suggestions on [http://www.pocketwizard.com/inspirations/technology/range/ PocketWizard.com]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The MiniTT1/FlexTT5 are E-TTL II compatible with these Canon flashes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Current Generation ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;580EX II&lt;br /&gt;
:Full feature compatibility.&lt;br /&gt;
:Range limited due to RF interference from flash only when connected to a remote FlexTT5.  See [[Range Extending Solutions]].&lt;br /&gt;
:Not range limited when used on a transmitting radio.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;430EX II&lt;br /&gt;
:Full feature compatibility.&lt;br /&gt;
:Excellent range performance with this flash.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;320EX&lt;br /&gt;
:Full Feature Compatiblity&lt;br /&gt;
:Excellent range performance with this flash. &lt;br /&gt;
::''Some RF interference present when LED lamp is on.''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;270EX II&lt;br /&gt;
:Can be used on the MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 (Transmit or Receive) in ETTL mode.&lt;br /&gt;
:Significantly range limited due to RF interference from flash only when connected to a remote FlexTT5.  See [[Range Extending Solutions]].&lt;br /&gt;
:To use this flash on a ControlTL radio mounted on a camera at HSS shutter speeds, you first need to enable HSS mode in the flash. Mount the 270EX directly on a camera (no radio in-between) and enable HSS mode via the camera’s menus. Once that mode is enabled, the flash will work properly at HSS shutter speeds when mounted on a MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 when used as a transmitter. HSS operation is automatic (no need to set it) when used on a FlexTT5 as a receiver.&lt;br /&gt;
:This flash may have occasional exposure issues when used on a MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 mounted directly on certain cameras like the 5D Mark II, 40D, 20D, and possibly others.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Previous Generation ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;580EX&lt;br /&gt;
:Full feature compatibility.&lt;br /&gt;
:Range limited due to RF interference from flash only when connected to a remote FlexTT5.  See [[Range Extending Solutions]].&lt;br /&gt;
:Not range limited when used on a transmitting radio.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;430EX:       &lt;br /&gt;
:Full feature compatibility.&lt;br /&gt;
:Significantly range limited due to RF interference from flash only when connected to a remote FlexTT5.  See [[Range Extending Solutions]].&lt;br /&gt;
:Not range limited when used on a transmitting radio.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;550EX&lt;br /&gt;
:Full feature compatibility.&lt;br /&gt;
:Excellent range performance with this flash.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;420EX&lt;br /&gt;
:Full feature compatibility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;270EX&lt;br /&gt;
:Can be used on the MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 (Transmit or Receive) in ETTL mode.&lt;br /&gt;
:Range slightly limited due to some RF interference from Speedlite only when connected to a remote FlexTT5.&lt;br /&gt;
:To use this flash on a ControlTL radio mounted on a camera at HSS shutter speeds, you first need to enable HSS mode in the flash. Mount the 270EX directly on a camera (no radio in-between) and enable HSS mode via the camera’s menus. Once that mode is enabled, the flash will work properly at HSS shutter speeds when mounted on a MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 when used as a transmitter. HSS operation is automatic (no need to set it) when used on a FlexTT5 as a receiver.&lt;br /&gt;
:This flash may have occasional exposure issues when used on a MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 mounted directly on certain cameras like the 5D Mark II, 40D, 20D, and possibly others.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;220EX&lt;br /&gt;
:Can be used on FlexTT5 as a receiver in E-TTL mode only.&lt;br /&gt;
:Cannot be used on MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 as a transmitter.&lt;br /&gt;
:This flash performs better if an OC-E3 cable is used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Misc Tab|BASIC TRIGGER MODE]]: Almost all cameras and flashes are compatible with the MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 when the radios are configured for Basic Trigger Mode.  Basic Trigger Mode disables all flash power control and TTL functions of the radios.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 3rd Party Speedlite Compatible Flashes ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Metz ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;58 AF-1 (Metz firmware v5.0)&lt;br /&gt;
;48 AF-1 (Metz firmware v4.0)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These flashes can only be used if [[Pre-Flash Boost]] is disabled on the [[Flash Tab]] in the [[PocketWizard Utility]] is disabled. ''Note: Pre-Flash Boost is disabled by default.''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These flashes may only be used on a remote FlexTT5 used as a receiver.  They are not compatible as on-camera MASTER flashes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Nissin ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Di866&lt;br /&gt;
;Di622&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A control was added to the [[Misc Tab]] in the [[PocketWizard Utility]] called “Top Shoe Detection Mode.” To use a Nissin Di866 or Di622 for Canon this control must be set for “Nissin Flash.” Most features of these flashes are supported.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These flashes may only be used on a remote FlexTT5 used as a receiver.  They are not compatible as on-camera MASTER flashes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Note: The Di866 Mark II and Di622 Mark II are currently not compatible.''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Operational Notes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 30D as remote camera ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When remote triggering the 30D camera remotely, it must be set to “Auto Power Off – Disable” otherwise once camera sleeps, trigger will not work.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 5D 1/8000th in Automatic Metering modes ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With some 5D's, the camera's shutter speed can get stuck at 1/8000th or f/22 when in P, Av or Tv mode, if a Speedlite is used in the top shoe of an on-camera PocketWizard. There is a known bug in the camera's firmware where the camera exhibits the same symptoms, but only with a Speedlite in manual mode. This can occur with or without PocketWizards.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Remote camera triggering delays ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the default settings, remote cameras will be limited to Single Shot mode and there will be a delay between subsequent triggers. You can avoid this delay completely if you set the FlexTT5 attached to the remote camera to Basic Trigger Mode. A PocketWizard in this mode acts as a simple trigger. Advanced features like TTL flash and High Speed Sync won't be available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Rear Curtain Sync not supported in Bulb Mode ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rear Curtain Sync and Bulb mode cannot be used together, as the radios cannot know when the shutter will be closed until it has been already.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 20D Remote Wireless Manual Mode over-exposures ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you use Remote Wireless Manual controls with a 580EX II in the top shoe of a Mini or Flex on a 20D, about 20% of the exposures result in overexposure with remote Speedlites.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Modes Not Supported ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Speedlite controls set via the in-camera menus, like Flash Exposure Compensation and ratio settings, are not currently supported.&lt;br /&gt;
*FEB (Flash Exposure Bracketing) and Stroboscopic Flash are not currently supported&lt;br /&gt;
*Enabling 1/2-stop exposure increments via the in-camera Custom Function menu will not work properly with our radios. The attached PocketWizard will blink red three times to indicate an error.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ian</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync&amp;diff=990</id>
		<title>HyperSync</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync&amp;diff=990"/>
				<updated>2011-09-13T16:16:56Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ian: /* PocketWizard Radio Receiving on a Standard Channel */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{recommended reading|High Speed Sync|}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section only talks about HyperSync. Read the section on [[Understanding HyperSync and High Speed Sync]] to learn more about the difference between HyperSync and High Speed Sync.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
HyperSync enables a PocketWizard connected flash to begin firing just *before* the camera triggers a sync pulse. Since you are &amp;quot;triggering faster than a wire&amp;quot; with HyperSync, you can sync at shutter speeds faster than X-sync for many cameras and get more usable flash energy before Auto FP (High Speed Sync) is activated. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When using transmitting and receiving ControlTL radios, HyperSync is adjusted separately on the transmitter and receiver. The on-camera MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 automatically adjusts HyperSync for the best performance and compensates for changes to shutter speed. The receiving ControlTL radio can additionally compensate for flash power level by making adjustments to achieve the fastest possible sync speed with supported configurations, such as a FlexTT5 with an [[AC9 AlienBees Adapter]], a [[PowerST4]], or a [[PowerMC2]]. Some configurations require adjustments via the PocketWizard Utility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All receiving PocketWizard radios, including the [[Plus II]], [[MultiMAX]], and [[Embedded Radios]] will trigger in sync with HyperSync.  HyperSync requires a MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 as a transmitter.  A Standard transmitter like a Plus II cannot trigger a remote FlexTT5 and achieve HyperSync.  This is because the MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 as transmitter actually sends out 2 signals every time it is triggered; one on a ControlTL Channel, and one on a Standard Channel channel. Read more about these different [[Channels]] here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
HyperSync can be customized on a per-flash basis. If you have Multiple flashes of different makes/models, you can now make HyperSync adjustments individually on each receiving FlexTT5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Configuring HyperSync ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using a transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 on your camera, follow the instructions below for your specific receiving PocketWizard radio and then take pictures normally.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Remote FlexTT5 with Speedlite in the Top Shoe ===&lt;br /&gt;
With the default settings, you can sync at any shutter speed. HyperSync Automation will be sued only at 1/320th with Speedlites, after which the transmitting ControlTL radio will switch to using High Speed Sync isntead. On the transmittign radio, adjust the &amp;quot;HSS/FP Begins At (HyperSync Ends)&amp;quot; control under the [[HyperSync/HSS Tab]] to specify the shutter speed at which HyperSync timings are no logner used and High Speed Sync/FP Sync is engaged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Transmitter-side Automated HyperSync will be used at all shutter speeds faster than x-sync until High Speed Sync is engaged. Receiver-side HyperSync automation is not currently supported for Canon Speedlites, as they do not communicate their power level through the hot shoe. For full HyperSync Automation with Speedlites, their power levels must be controlled via a Speedlite in Master Mode or AC3 ZoneController at camera position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== FlexTT5 - Flash Connected to P2 Port ===&lt;br /&gt;
• On the receiving FlexTT5, select the “P2 HyperSync Flash Duration” dropdown menu under the [[HyperSync/HSS Tab]] and choose a duration to match the estimated flash duration of your strobe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Attach the transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 to your camera. Connect the receiving FlexTT5 to the flash and take pictures normally.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===[[AC9 AlienBees Adapter]]===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• On the receiving FlexTT5, select the flash connected to the AC9 AlienBees Adapter in the [[HyperSync/HSS Tab]] of the [[PocketWizard Utility]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Attach the transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 to your camera. Connect the receiving FlexTT5 and AC9 AlienBees Adapter to the flash and take pictures normally.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As of this firmware release, HyperSync Automation is currently implemented for the following Paul C. Buff flashes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;text-align:center;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|AlienBees AB400&lt;br /&gt;
|White Lightning X800&lt;br /&gt;
|Zeus 1250&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|AlienBees AB800&lt;br /&gt;
|White Lightning X1600&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|AlienBees AB1600&lt;br /&gt;
|White Lightning X3200&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|AlienBees ABR800 RingFlash&lt;br /&gt;
|White Lightning Ultra1200&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your flash is connected to an AC9 AlienBees adapter and is not in the list above, try selecting a flash of a similar power level.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===[[PowerMC2]]===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No configuration is necessary. Attach the transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 to your camera. Connect the receiving PowerMC2 to the flash and take pictures normally.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Note that the Einstein E640 Flash is an IGBT-controlled flash, and has an extremely short flash duration once set to anything less than full power. As such, the Einstein will see best HyperSync performance when used at full power.''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===[[PowerST4]]===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• If the receiving PocketWizard radio is a PowerST4 connected to a Ranger RX series or Digital 1200RX/2400RX pack, choose the Elinchom flash head in use under the [[PocketWizard Utility#Misc Tab|Misc Tab]] in the [[PocketWizard Utility]]. This control is set specifically on the receiving PowerST4. The Ranger S head will offer better HyperSync performance than the A head due to its longer flash duration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Attach the transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 to your camera. Connect the receiving PowerST4 to the flash and take pictures normally.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At present, HyperSync Automation is currently implemented for the following Elinchrom flashes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;text-align:center;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=3 |Elinchrom Flashes&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Style 300RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Digital 1200RX or Digital 2400RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Digital S Head&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Ranger S Head&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Style 600RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Digital 1200RX or Digital 2400RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Digital SE Head&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Ranger A Head&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Style 1200RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Digital 1200RX or Digital 2400RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Mini A Head&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX Speed&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Ranger S Head&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|Digital 1200RX or Digital 2400RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Mini S Head&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX Speed&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Ranger A Head&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|Digital 1200RX or Digital 2400RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with A3000 Head&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX Speed A/s&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Ranger S Head&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|Digital 1200RX or Digital 2400RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with A6000 Head&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX Speed A/s&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Ranger A Head&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your flash is connected to a PowerST4 and is not in the list above, set the remote ControlTL radio to receive on a Standard Channel and configure HyperSync using the HyperSync Transmitter Controls, as described below. Make sure to disable High Speed Sync from the transmitting radio.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== PocketWizard Radio Receiving on a Standard Channel ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
([[Plus II]], [[MultiMAX]], [[Misc_Tab#Basic_Trigger|FlexTT5 in Basic Trigger Mode]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the transmitting radio, adjust the HSS/FP Beings AT (HyperSync Ends) control under the [[HyperSync/HSS tab]] to specify the shutter speed at which HyperSync Timings are no longer used and High Speed Sync is engaged. Alternatively, [[High Speed Sync]] can be disabled entirely via the [[HyperSync/HSS Tab#HyperSync Only (Disably HSS/FP)|HyperSync Only]] checkbox.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Triggers on Standard Channels will only be sent at shutter speeds where High Speed Sync is disabled. Transmitter-side Automated HyperSync will be used at all shutter speed faster than x-sync until High Speed Sync is engaged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• For the transmitting ControlTL radio, select the “Flash Duration Selection” dropdown menu under the Sync Timing tab and choose a duration to match the estimated flash duration of your strobe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Attach the transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 to your camera. Connect the receiving PocketWizard radio to the flash and take pictures normally.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• See the [[HyperSync/HSS_Tab#P2_HyperSync_Flash_Duration|P2 HyperSync Flash Duration]] section for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To use HyperSync at any shutter speed up to 1/8000th and never transition to High Speed Sync, check the “HyperSync Only (Disable HSS/FP)” box, also under the [[HyperSync/HSS Tab]].&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ian</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=Canon_Compatibility&amp;diff=955</id>
		<title>Canon Compatibility</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=Canon_Compatibility&amp;diff=955"/>
				<updated>2011-09-09T14:42:41Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ian: /* 5D 1/8000th in Av mode */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This section contains compatibility information for the Canon [[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5]] ControlTL radios.{{recommended reading|PocketWizard Utility|}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Camera Compatibility ==&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 for Canon are compatible with these modern Canon digital cameras capable of using Canon's latest E-TTL II protocol:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=1 style=&amp;quot;text-align:center&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|1Ds Mark III&lt;br /&gt;
|1D Mark IV&lt;br /&gt;
|7D&lt;br /&gt;
|60D&lt;br /&gt;
|Rebel T3i / 600D&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1Ds Mark II&lt;br /&gt;
|1D Mark III&lt;br /&gt;
|5D Mark II&lt;br /&gt;
|50D&lt;br /&gt;
|Rebel T3 / 1100D&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|1D Mark II N&lt;br /&gt;
|5D&lt;br /&gt;
|40D&lt;br /&gt;
|Rebel T2i/550D&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|1D Mark II&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|30D&lt;br /&gt;
|Rebel T1i/500D&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|20D&lt;br /&gt;
|Rebel XSi/450D&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|Rebel XTi/400D&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|Rebel XT/350D&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|Rebel XS/1000D&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For optimal performance, it is highly recommended to specify your camera model in the [[Misc Tab#Camera Model (Canon Only)|Misc Tab]] of the [[PocketWizard Utility]] for your transmitting radio.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Misc Tab|BASIC TRIGGER MODE]]: Almost all cameras and flashes are compatible with the MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 when the radios are configured for Basic Trigger Mode.  Basic Trigger Mode disables all flash power control and TTL functions of the radios.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Canon's PowerShot cameras, such as the G9, G10, G11, G12 and earlier models, are not supported with our radios. Although these cameras can use many of the same flashes as modern Canon DSLRs, they use a very different implementation of Canon's ETTL II protocol.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Speedlite Compatibility ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Special Note:'''  Canon Speedlite models 580EX and 580EX II, and especially the older 430EX (not the newer 430EX II), emit RF interference that can substantially reduce the effective operating range of many radio slaves, including the FlexTT5 when used as a receiver. For these model flashes, please utilize the mounting suggestions on [http://www.pocketwizard.com/inspirations/technology/range/ PocketWizard.com]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The MiniTT1/FlexTT5 are E-TTL II compatible with these Canon flashes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Current Generation ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;580EX II&lt;br /&gt;
:Full feature compatibility.&lt;br /&gt;
:Range limited due to RF interference from flash only when connected to a remote FlexTT5.  See [[Range Extending Solutions]].&lt;br /&gt;
:Not range limited when used on a transmitting radio.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;430EX II&lt;br /&gt;
:Full feature compatibility.&lt;br /&gt;
:Excellent range performance with this flash.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;320EX&lt;br /&gt;
:Full Feature Compatiblity&lt;br /&gt;
:Excellent range performance with this flash. &lt;br /&gt;
::''Some RF interference present when LED lamp is on.''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;270EX II&lt;br /&gt;
:Can be used on the MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 (Transmit or Receive) in ETTL mode.&lt;br /&gt;
:Significantly range limited due to RF interference from flash only when connected to a remote FlexTT5.  See [[Range Extending Solutions]].&lt;br /&gt;
:To use this flash on a ControlTL radio mounted on a camera at HSS shutter speeds, you first need to enable HSS mode in the flash. Mount the 270EX directly on a camera (no radio in-between) and enable HSS mode via the camera’s menus. Once that mode is enabled, the flash will work properly at HSS shutter speeds when mounted on a MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 when used as a transmitter. HSS operation is automatic (no need to set it) when used on a FlexTT5 as a receiver.&lt;br /&gt;
:This flash may have occasional exposure issues when used on a MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 mounted directly on certain cameras like the 5D Mark II, 40D, 20D, and possibly others.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Previous Generation ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;580EX&lt;br /&gt;
:Full feature compatibility.&lt;br /&gt;
:Range limited due to RF interference from flash only when connected to a remote FlexTT5.  See [[Range Extending Solutions]].&lt;br /&gt;
:Not range limited when used on a transmitting radio.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;430EX:       &lt;br /&gt;
:Full feature compatibility.&lt;br /&gt;
:Significantly range limited due to RF interference from flash only when connected to a remote FlexTT5.  See [[Range Extending Solutions]].&lt;br /&gt;
:Not range limited when used on a transmitting radio.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;550EX&lt;br /&gt;
:Full feature compatibility.&lt;br /&gt;
:Excellent range performance with this flash.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;420EX&lt;br /&gt;
:Full feature compatibility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;270EX&lt;br /&gt;
:Can be used on the MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 (Transmit or Receive) in ETTL mode.&lt;br /&gt;
:Range slightly limited due to some RF interference from Speedlite only when connected to a remote FlexTT5.&lt;br /&gt;
:To use this flash on a ControlTL radio mounted on a camera at HSS shutter speeds, you first need to enable HSS mode in the flash. Mount the 270EX directly on a camera (no radio in-between) and enable HSS mode via the camera’s menus. Once that mode is enabled, the flash will work properly at HSS shutter speeds when mounted on a MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 when used as a transmitter. HSS operation is automatic (no need to set it) when used on a FlexTT5 as a receiver.&lt;br /&gt;
:This flash may have occasional exposure issues when used on a MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 mounted directly on certain cameras like the 5D Mark II, 40D, 20D, and possibly others.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;220EX&lt;br /&gt;
:Can be used on FlexTT5 as a receiver in E-TTL mode only.&lt;br /&gt;
:Cannot be used on MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 as a transmitter.&lt;br /&gt;
:This flash performs better if an OC-E3 cable is used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Misc Tab|BASIC TRIGGER MODE]]: Almost all cameras and flashes are compatible with the MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 when the radios are configured for Basic Trigger Mode.  Basic Trigger Mode disables all flash power control and TTL functions of the radios.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 3rd Party Speedlite Compatible Flashes ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Metz ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;58 AF-1 (Metz firmware v5.0)&lt;br /&gt;
;48 AF-1 (Metz firmware v4.0)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These flashes can only be used if [[Pre-Flash Boost]] is disabled on the [[Flash Tab]] in the [[PocketWizard Utility]] is disabled. ''Note: Pre-Flash Boost is disabled by default.''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These flashes may only be used on a remote FlexTT5 used as a receiver.  They are not compatible as on-camera MASTER flashes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Nissin ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Di866&lt;br /&gt;
;Di622&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A control was added to the [[Misc Tab]] in the [[PocketWizard Utility]] called “Top Shoe Detection Mode.” To use a Nissin Di866 or Di622 for Canon this control must be set for “Nissin Flash.” Most features of these flashes are supported.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These flashes may only be used on a remote FlexTT5 used as a receiver.  They are not compatible as on-camera MASTER flashes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Note: The Di866 Mark II and Di622 Mark II are currently not compatible.''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Operational Notes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 30D as remote camera ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When remote triggering the 30D camera remotely, it must be set to “Auto Power Off – Disable” otherwise once camera sleeps, trigger will not work.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 5D 1/8000th in Av mode ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With some 5Ds, the camera's shutter speed can get stuck at 1/8000th or f/22 when in P, Av or Tv mode, if a Speedlite is used in the top shoe of an on-camera PocketWizard. There is a known bug in the camera's firmware where the camera exhibits the same symptoms, but only with a Speedlite in manual mode. This can occur with or without PocketWizards.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Remote camera triggering delays ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the default settings, remote cameras will be limited to Single Shot mode and there will be a delay between subsequent triggers. You can avoid this delay completely if you set the FlexTT5 attached to the remote camera to Basic Trigger Mode. A PocketWizard in this mode acts as a simple trigger. Advanced features like TTL flash and High Speed Sync won't be available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Rear Curtain Sync not supported in Bulb Mode ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rear Curtain Sync and Bulb mode cannot be used together, as the radios cannot know when the shutter will be closed until it has been already.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 20D Remote Wireless Manual Mode over-exposures ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you use Remote Wireless Manual controls with a 580EX II in the top shoe of a Mini or Flex on a 20D, about 20% of the exposures result in overexposure with remote Speedlites.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Modes Not Supported ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Speedlite controls set via the in-camera menus, like Flash Exposure Compensation and ratio settings, are not currently supported.&lt;br /&gt;
*FEB (Flash Exposure Bracketing) and Stroboscopic Flash are not currently supported&lt;br /&gt;
*Enabling 1/2-stop exposure increments via the in-camera Custom Function menu will not work properly with our radios. The attached PocketWizard will blink red three times to indicate an error.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ian</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=The_FAQ&amp;diff=954</id>
		<title>The FAQ</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=The_FAQ&amp;diff=954"/>
				<updated>2011-09-08T21:45:14Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ian: /* How can I trigger a FlexTT5 from a PocketWizard module-equipped Sekonic meter? */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'''Our TOP TEN (plus one) most asked simple questions.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It’s understandable you might get into a situation while working with the [[MiniTT1_and_FlexTT5|MiniTT1® and FlexTT5®]] and today’s complex camera systems where you’re not sure why something isn’t working as you would expect it. Most of the time, there is a simple solution. We asked our [http://www.pocketwizard.com/contact/inquiry/ tech support] crew to give us the “Top Ten” questions consumers asked to keep their system working properly. Here they are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Nothing is working! What should I do?====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A: Try these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Check the [[batteries]]: weak batteries can cause strange behavior.&lt;br /&gt;
*Make sure all radios (and cameras and speedlights) are updated to the latest [[PocketWizard Utility|firmware]]. Try our [[Beta Lab|beta firmware]] as it often has new fixes ready to be tried.&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Factory Reset]] the radios.&lt;br /&gt;
*Take your first shot at 1/160th or 1/200th so the system can properly calibrate timing.&lt;br /&gt;
*Wait about 3 seconds after turning on your radio before taking your first picture.&lt;br /&gt;
*Take your time! Whenever possible, compose the image with the shutter release half-pressed before taking the picture.&lt;br /&gt;
*If still having issues after trying the above, save your camera’s custom functions, reset the camera, then start adding them back in one at a time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====In what order should I turn things on?====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A: Top down: Flash, then radio, then camera. Wait 2-3 seconds between each step. Older Quick Guides may have this slightly different, but top down works for all current radios and firmware.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
====My Nikon camera won’t let me choose a shutter speed faster than x-sync. How can I shoot at faster shutter speeds?====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A: Nikon cameras require that FP-sync is enabled to shoot faster than x-sync if they detect a TTL-capable device in their hot shoe. Enabling FP-sync is done in the Custom Settings menu. Set “e1 flash sync speed” to 1/250s (Auto FP).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Note that some cameras may have different a different menu setting to enable Auto FP, and that some cameras are not capable of HSS/FP-Sync operation. Check your camera's manual for more information.''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====The ISO on my remote Nikon Speedlight is stuck at 200. What’s wrong?====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A: It isn’t required for TTL operation on the remote flash and has no effect on exposure, so the radios do not transmit camera setting information like ISO to remote flashes. The remote FlexTT5 simply gives the flash a default value on power-up, which is ISO 200.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====I set my speedlight to MASTER and stuck it on a remote FlexTT5. Why won’t it control other flashes when I have a MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 on my camera?====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A: The ControlTL® system, just like Nikon and Canon native systems, expects the MASTER speedlight to be only at the camera position so “Remote MASTER” operation is not supported. Setting a remote flash to MASTER mode will result in an [[Status LED#Error Condition|Error Condition]] You need a receiving FlexTT5 for each remote speedlight.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====My remote speedlights don’t change their zoom when I zoom the lens on my camera. What’s wrong?====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A: Zoom tracking is a feature for on-camera flash and would cause some lighting issues if done on remotes. Nikon and Canon native systems do not have zoom tracking for remote or slave flashes either.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====How can I trigger a FlexTT5 from a PocketWizard module-equipped Sekonic meter?====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A: This PW TV episode explains it all: &amp;lt;div align=center&amp;gt;&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;zOOq3sX6Ki4&amp;amp;autohide=1|425|240&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Note: We recommend using Basic Trigger Mode to set the Standard Channel, instead of the &amp;quot;Use ControlTL for Receive&amp;quot; checkbox mentioned in this video. Check Basic Trigger Mode under the Misc tab first, and then set your Standard Receive Channel under the Channels Tab. If using a Canon FlexTT5, you'll need to first uncheck Force TTL Master Mode.''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====What cable do I need?====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A: You can use the [http://www.pocketwizard.com/support/cable_finder/ Cable Finder] at PocketWizard.com to find the right cable for lots of different cameras and flashes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Can I combine radio and optical so I don’t have to buy as many FlexTT5s? Can I connect more than one speedlight to a single FlexTT5?====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A: Currently you need to have one FlexTT5 for each speedlight you want to control via radio.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Is “xxxxxxx” brand/model flash compatible with your radios?====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A: Some third party flashes are compatible with our radios – you can read more about our radios compatibility on their respective product pages ([[Canon_Compatibility|FlexTT5 for Canon]], [[Nikon_Compatibility|FlexTT5 for Nikon]]). Also, almost any flash can be used in [[Misc Tab#Basic Trigger|Basic Trigger Mode]] for simple triggering operation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Will you ever have ControlTL in a Sekonic meter?====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A: A module with the ControlTL channels is being developed. We do not have a release date for it at this time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Still have a question? Search this [[Main_Page|Wiki]], see a list of our [http://www.pocketwizard.com/support/repair/ worldwide distributors], or [http://www.pocketwizard.com/contact/inquiry/ contact us by email]!&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ian</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync&amp;diff=953</id>
		<title>HyperSync</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync&amp;diff=953"/>
				<updated>2011-09-06T18:36:34Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ian: /* PowerMC2 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{recommended reading|High Speed Sync|}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section only talks about HyperSync. Read the section on [[Understanding HyperSync and High Speed Sync]] to learn more about the difference between HyperSync and High Speed Sync.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
HyperSync enables a PocketWizard connected flash to begin firing just *before* the camera triggers a sync pulse. Since you are &amp;quot;triggering faster than a wire&amp;quot; with HyperSync, you can sync at shutter speeds faster than X-sync for many cameras and get more usable flash energy before Auto FP (High Speed Sync) is activated. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When using transmitting and receiving ControlTL radios, HyperSync is adjusted separately on the transmitter and receiver. The on-camera MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 automatically adjusts HyperSync for the best performance and compensates for changes to shutter speed. The receiving ControlTL radio can additionally compensate for flash power level by making adjustments to achieve the fastest possible sync speed with supported configurations, such as a FlexTT5 with an [[AC9 AlienBees Adapter]], a [[PowerST4]], or a [[PowerMC2]]. Some configurations require adjustments via the PocketWizard Utility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All receiving PocketWizard radios, including the [[Plus II]], [[MultiMAX]], and [[Embedded Radios]] will trigger in sync with HyperSync.  HyperSync requires a MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 as a transmitter.  A Standard transmitter like a Plus II cannot trigger a remote FlexTT5 and achieve HyperSync.  This is because the MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 as transmitter actually sends out 2 signals every time it is triggered; one on a ControlTL Channel, and one on a Standard Channel channel. Read more about these different [[Channels]] here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
HyperSync can be customized on a per-flash basis. If you have Multiple flashes of different makes/models, you can now make HyperSync adjustments individually on each receiving FlexTT5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Configuring HyperSync ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using a transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 on your camera, follow the instructions below for your specific receiving PocketWizard radio and then take pictures normally.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Remote FlexTT5 with Speedlite in the Top Shoe ===&lt;br /&gt;
With the default settings, you can sync at any shutter speed. HyperSync Automation will be sued only at 1/320th with Speedlites, after which the transmitting ControlTL radio will switch to using High Speed Sync isntead. On the transmittign radio, adjust the &amp;quot;HSS/FP Begins At (HyperSync Ends)&amp;quot; control under the [[HyperSync/HSS Tab]] to specify the shutter speed at which HyperSync timings are no logner used and High Speed Sync/FP Sync is engaged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Transmitter-side Automated HyperSync will be used at all shutter speeds faster than x-sync until High Speed Sync is engaged. Receiver-side HyperSync automation is not currently supported for Canon Speedlites, as they do not communicate their power level through the hot shoe. For full HyperSync Automation with Speedlites, their power levels must be controlled via a Speedlite in Master Mode or AC3 ZoneController at camera position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== FlexTT5 - Flash Connected to P2 Port ===&lt;br /&gt;
• On the receiving FlexTT5, select the “P2 HyperSync Flash Duration” dropdown menu under the [[HyperSync/HSS Tab]] and choose a duration to match the estimated flash duration of your strobe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Attach the transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 to your camera. Connect the receiving FlexTT5 to the flash and take pictures normally.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===[[AC9 AlienBees Adapter]]===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• On the receiving FlexTT5, select the flash connected to the AC9 AlienBees Adapter in the [[HyperSync/HSS Tab]] of the [[PocketWizard Utility]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Attach the transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 to your camera. Connect the receiving FlexTT5 and AC9 AlienBees Adapter to the flash and take pictures normally.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As of this firmware release, HyperSync Automation is currently implemented for the following Paul C. Buff flashes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;text-align:center;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|AlienBees AB400&lt;br /&gt;
|White Lightning X800&lt;br /&gt;
|Zeus 1250&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|AlienBees AB800&lt;br /&gt;
|White Lightning X1600&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|AlienBees AB1600&lt;br /&gt;
|White Lightning X3200&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|AlienBees ABR800 RingFlash&lt;br /&gt;
|White Lightning Ultra1200&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your flash is connected to an AC9 AlienBees adapter and is not in the list above, try selecting a flash of a similar power level.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===[[PowerMC2]]===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No configuration is necessary. Attach the transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 to your camera. Connect the receiving PowerMC2 to the flash and take pictures normally.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Note that the Einstein E640 Flash is an IGBT-controlled flash, and has an extremely short flash duration once set to anything less than full power. As such, the Einstein will see best HyperSync performance when used at full power.''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===[[PowerST4]]===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• If the receiving PocketWizard radio is a PowerST4 connected to a Ranger RX series or Digital 1200RX/2400RX pack, choose the Elinchom flash head in use under the [[PocketWizard Utility#Misc Tab|Misc Tab]] in the [[PocketWizard Utility]]. This control is set specifically on the receiving PowerST4. The Ranger S head will offer better HyperSync performance than the A head due to its longer flash duration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Attach the transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 to your camera. Connect the receiving PowerST4 to the flash and take pictures normally.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At present, HyperSync Automation is currently implemented for the following Elinchrom flashes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;text-align:center;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=3 |Elinchrom Flashes&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Style 300RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Digital 1200RX or Digital 2400RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Digital S Head&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Ranger S Head&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Style 600RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Digital 1200RX or Digital 2400RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Digital SE Head&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Ranger A Head&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Style 1200RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Digital 1200RX or Digital 2400RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Mini A Head&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX Speed&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Ranger S Head&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|Digital 1200RX or Digital 2400RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Mini S Head&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX Speed&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Ranger A Head&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|Digital 1200RX or Digital 2400RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with A3000 Head&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX Speed A/s&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Ranger S Head&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|Digital 1200RX or Digital 2400RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with A6000 Head&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX Speed A/s&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Ranger A Head&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your flash is connected to a PowerST4 and is not in the list above, set the remote ControlTL radio to receive on a Standard Channel and configure HyperSync using the HyperSync Transmitter Controls, as described below. Make sure to disable High Speed Sync from the transmitting radio.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== PocketWizard Radio Receiving on a Standard Channel ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
([[Plus II]], [[MultiMAX]], [[Misc_Tab#Basic_Trigger|FlexTT5 in Basic Trigger Mode]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the transmitting radio, adjust the HSS/FP Beings AT (HyperSync Ends) control under the [[HyperSync/HSS tab]] to specify the shutter speed at which HyperSync Timings are no longer used and High Speed Sync is engaged. Triggers on Standard Channels will only be sent at shutter speeds where High Speed Sync is disabled. Transmitter-side Automated HyperSync will be used at all shutter speed faster than x-sync until High Speed Sync is engaged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• For the transmitting ControlTL radio, select the “Flash Duration Selection” dropdown menu under the Sync Timing tab and choose a duration to match the estimated flash duration of your strobe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Attach the transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 to your camera. Connect the receiving PocketWizard radio to the flash and take pictures normally.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• See the [[HyperSync/HSS_Tab#P2_HyperSync_Flash_Duration|P2 HyperSync Flash Duration]] section for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To use HyperSync at any shutter speed up to 1/8000th and never transition to High Speed Sync, check the “HyperSync Only (Disable HSS/FP)” box, also under the [[HyperSync/HSS Tab]].&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ian</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync&amp;diff=952</id>
		<title>HyperSync</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync&amp;diff=952"/>
				<updated>2011-09-06T18:36:15Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ian: /* PowerMC2 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{recommended reading|High Speed Sync|}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section only talks about HyperSync. Read the section on [[Understanding HyperSync and High Speed Sync]] to learn more about the difference between HyperSync and High Speed Sync.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
HyperSync enables a PocketWizard connected flash to begin firing just *before* the camera triggers a sync pulse. Since you are &amp;quot;triggering faster than a wire&amp;quot; with HyperSync, you can sync at shutter speeds faster than X-sync for many cameras and get more usable flash energy before Auto FP (High Speed Sync) is activated. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When using transmitting and receiving ControlTL radios, HyperSync is adjusted separately on the transmitter and receiver. The on-camera MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 automatically adjusts HyperSync for the best performance and compensates for changes to shutter speed. The receiving ControlTL radio can additionally compensate for flash power level by making adjustments to achieve the fastest possible sync speed with supported configurations, such as a FlexTT5 with an [[AC9 AlienBees Adapter]], a [[PowerST4]], or a [[PowerMC2]]. Some configurations require adjustments via the PocketWizard Utility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All receiving PocketWizard radios, including the [[Plus II]], [[MultiMAX]], and [[Embedded Radios]] will trigger in sync with HyperSync.  HyperSync requires a MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 as a transmitter.  A Standard transmitter like a Plus II cannot trigger a remote FlexTT5 and achieve HyperSync.  This is because the MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 as transmitter actually sends out 2 signals every time it is triggered; one on a ControlTL Channel, and one on a Standard Channel channel. Read more about these different [[Channels]] here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
HyperSync can be customized on a per-flash basis. If you have Multiple flashes of different makes/models, you can now make HyperSync adjustments individually on each receiving FlexTT5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Configuring HyperSync ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using a transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 on your camera, follow the instructions below for your specific receiving PocketWizard radio and then take pictures normally.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Remote FlexTT5 with Speedlite in the Top Shoe ===&lt;br /&gt;
With the default settings, you can sync at any shutter speed. HyperSync Automation will be sued only at 1/320th with Speedlites, after which the transmitting ControlTL radio will switch to using High Speed Sync isntead. On the transmittign radio, adjust the &amp;quot;HSS/FP Begins At (HyperSync Ends)&amp;quot; control under the [[HyperSync/HSS Tab]] to specify the shutter speed at which HyperSync timings are no logner used and High Speed Sync/FP Sync is engaged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Transmitter-side Automated HyperSync will be used at all shutter speeds faster than x-sync until High Speed Sync is engaged. Receiver-side HyperSync automation is not currently supported for Canon Speedlites, as they do not communicate their power level through the hot shoe. For full HyperSync Automation with Speedlites, their power levels must be controlled via a Speedlite in Master Mode or AC3 ZoneController at camera position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== FlexTT5 - Flash Connected to P2 Port ===&lt;br /&gt;
• On the receiving FlexTT5, select the “P2 HyperSync Flash Duration” dropdown menu under the [[HyperSync/HSS Tab]] and choose a duration to match the estimated flash duration of your strobe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Attach the transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 to your camera. Connect the receiving FlexTT5 to the flash and take pictures normally.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===[[AC9 AlienBees Adapter]]===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• On the receiving FlexTT5, select the flash connected to the AC9 AlienBees Adapter in the [[HyperSync/HSS Tab]] of the [[PocketWizard Utility]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Attach the transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 to your camera. Connect the receiving FlexTT5 and AC9 AlienBees Adapter to the flash and take pictures normally.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As of this firmware release, HyperSync Automation is currently implemented for the following Paul C. Buff flashes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;text-align:center;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|AlienBees AB400&lt;br /&gt;
|White Lightning X800&lt;br /&gt;
|Zeus 1250&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|AlienBees AB800&lt;br /&gt;
|White Lightning X1600&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|AlienBees AB1600&lt;br /&gt;
|White Lightning X3200&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|AlienBees ABR800 RingFlash&lt;br /&gt;
|White Lightning Ultra1200&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your flash is connected to an AC9 AlienBees adapter and is not in the list above, try selecting a flash of a similar power level.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===[[PowerMC2]]===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No configuration is necessary. Attach the transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 to your camera. Connect the receiving PowerMC2 to the flash and take pictures normally.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Note that the Einstein E640 Flash is an IGBT-controlled flash, and has extremely short flash duration once set to anything less than full power. As such, the Einstein will see best HyperSync performance when used at full power.''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===[[PowerST4]]===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• If the receiving PocketWizard radio is a PowerST4 connected to a Ranger RX series or Digital 1200RX/2400RX pack, choose the Elinchom flash head in use under the [[PocketWizard Utility#Misc Tab|Misc Tab]] in the [[PocketWizard Utility]]. This control is set specifically on the receiving PowerST4. The Ranger S head will offer better HyperSync performance than the A head due to its longer flash duration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Attach the transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 to your camera. Connect the receiving PowerST4 to the flash and take pictures normally.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At present, HyperSync Automation is currently implemented for the following Elinchrom flashes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;text-align:center;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=3 |Elinchrom Flashes&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Style 300RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Digital 1200RX or Digital 2400RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Digital S Head&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Ranger S Head&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Style 600RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Digital 1200RX or Digital 2400RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Digital SE Head&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Ranger A Head&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Style 1200RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Digital 1200RX or Digital 2400RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Mini A Head&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX Speed&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Ranger S Head&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|Digital 1200RX or Digital 2400RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Mini S Head&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX Speed&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Ranger A Head&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|Digital 1200RX or Digital 2400RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with A3000 Head&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX Speed A/s&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Ranger S Head&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|Digital 1200RX or Digital 2400RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with A6000 Head&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX Speed A/s&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Ranger A Head&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your flash is connected to a PowerST4 and is not in the list above, set the remote ControlTL radio to receive on a Standard Channel and configure HyperSync using the HyperSync Transmitter Controls, as described below. Make sure to disable High Speed Sync from the transmitting radio.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== PocketWizard Radio Receiving on a Standard Channel ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
([[Plus II]], [[MultiMAX]], [[Misc_Tab#Basic_Trigger|FlexTT5 in Basic Trigger Mode]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the transmitting radio, adjust the HSS/FP Beings AT (HyperSync Ends) control under the [[HyperSync/HSS tab]] to specify the shutter speed at which HyperSync Timings are no longer used and High Speed Sync is engaged. Triggers on Standard Channels will only be sent at shutter speeds where High Speed Sync is disabled. Transmitter-side Automated HyperSync will be used at all shutter speed faster than x-sync until High Speed Sync is engaged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• For the transmitting ControlTL radio, select the “Flash Duration Selection” dropdown menu under the Sync Timing tab and choose a duration to match the estimated flash duration of your strobe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Attach the transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 to your camera. Connect the receiving PocketWizard radio to the flash and take pictures normally.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• See the [[HyperSync/HSS_Tab#P2_HyperSync_Flash_Duration|P2 HyperSync Flash Duration]] section for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To use HyperSync at any shutter speed up to 1/8000th and never transition to High Speed Sync, check the “HyperSync Only (Disable HSS/FP)” box, also under the [[HyperSync/HSS Tab]].&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ian</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=PowerMC2&amp;diff=951</id>
		<title>PowerMC2</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=PowerMC2&amp;diff=951"/>
				<updated>2011-09-06T17:36:32Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ian: /* PowerTracking */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Receiver with ControlTL® for Einstein­™ E640 Flash==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PWPOWERMC2.jpg|right|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The PowerMC2 Receiver Module enables remote power control of Einstein™ E640 flashes using PocketWizard [[ControlTL]] technology.  With a [[MiniTT1_and_FlexTT5|MiniTT1 Transmitter or FlexTT5 Transceiver]] on your camera and a PowerMC2 plugged into your Einstein™ E640 flash, you can now adjust the flash power settings directly from the camera position. Add the [[AC3 ZoneController]] and you can control three different zones of lights in 1/3-stop increments with up to a six-stop range.  Utilize PocketWizard’s unique features such as [[HyperSync]] and Optimized [[Rear Curtain Sync]] for maximum control of your lighting.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;iZQCMtxySQk&amp;amp;autohide=1|425|240&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Special Warning==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When connecting the PowerMC2 to the [[PocketWizard Utility]], make sure to disconnect the PowerMC2 from any attached flash first.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Do not connect the PowerMC2 to USB while also connected to the Einstein E640 flash.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Damage to your PowerMC2, Einstein, or Computer's USB port could result.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Using your PowerMC2==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PowerMC2Einstein.jpg|right|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
'''1.''' Connect the PowerMC2 to your Einstein™ E640 Flash via the remote port, then power on the flash.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''2.''' Select the Channel and Zone A, B, or C via the E640’s LCD.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''3.''' Set up your PocketWizard transmitter and take pictures normally. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''4.''' Adjust the camera’s Flash Exposure Compensation (FEC) to adjust the power of your remote flash. See the [[#Basic Power Control|Basic Power Control]] section for more information about FEC.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Make sure all your radios are set to the same PocketWizard [[Channels|channel]].'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Status LED blinks '''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:green;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Green&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''' every few seconds to indicate normal operation. It will blink '''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Red&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''' in sync with a trigger. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Momentarily pressing TEST will test trigger the flash.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your PowerMC2 needs to be on the same channel as your transmitter. [[Channels]] can be set via the Einstein’s built-in LCD. The PowerMC2 is capable of receiving on either ControlTL Channels for use with ControlTL radios like the MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 or [[Channels#Standard_Channels|Standard Channels]] for triggering with the [[Plus II]], [[MultiMAX]], and [[Sekonic]] meters. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To set the channel, press the Einstein’s™ FUNCTION button until the Channel selection box is highlighted, and then change channels with the ADJUST buttons. Press the FUNCTION button again to specify a zone. When using ControlTL Channels, or Standard Channels 17-32, you can specify zone A, B, or C.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note:''' When receiving on Standard Channels, the PowerMC2 will be unable to do any form of PowerTracking, or remote Manual Power Control. You must be using a ControlTL radio in ControlTL radio mode for the Einstein to be able to engage in any form of ControlTL feature.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
===== [[ControlTL]] =====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:controltl.jpg|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
PocketWizard’s newest firmware platform taps into the camera’s digital communications to enable an entirely new level of remote flash capability through our proven radio system.   ControlTL allows remote [[Basic Wireless TTL|TTL]] systems as well as Manual Power Control.  ControlTL firmware is configurable and [[PocketWizard Utility|upgradeable]] for “future-proof” continuous improvement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Manual Power Control =====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:manual_power_control.jpg|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
Adjust the manual power settings of your remote Einstein flash directly from a [[AC3 ZoneController]], or master flash mounted on your on-camera [[MiniTT1_and_FlexTT5|MiniTT1 or FlexTT5]].  You can independently control the power output of up to three remote groups of lights (you can have as many lights in each group as you want) from full power down to the lowest setting through the user interface on the back of the master flash or with the dials of the AC3 ZoneController.   Now you can work with total control with your remote lights, without leaving your shooting position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== [[HyperSync]] =====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Hypersync.jpg|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
Our patent pending HyperSync® technology allows photographers to achieve faster X-sync speeds with full power flash.  That extra speed can be used to freeze action or cut ambient light - both of which can produce results never possible before. HyperSync works automatically with the PowerMC2.  All you need is a MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 on camera to gain the benefits of HyperSync. While performance varies by the camera and flash equipment being used, HyperSync will get the maximum possible out of any configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== [[PowerTracking]] =====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:powertracking.jpg|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
When working with certain manual flashes, you can change any of your settings on your camera and the system adjusts for those settings.  Change your camera's exposure compensation to adjust the flash output, or make adjustments in aperture or ISO and the system balances your flash for proper exposure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Note that Flash Exposure Compensation can also be dialed in on a per-flash basis, by changing the PowerMC2's settings in the [[Exposure Tab]] of the [[PocketWizard Utility]].''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[PowerTracking#Basic Power Control|Basic Power Control]]====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With only a MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 on your camera, your camera’s FEC (Flash Exposure Compensation) control will adjust your flash power output level for all your PowerMC2-connected flashes as shown in the table below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Camera FEC/EC &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; - or -&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;AC3 Power Dial in Manual'''&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Einstein E640 Power Output'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| +3&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |1/1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| +2.7&lt;br /&gt;
|1/2 + 0.6&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| +2.3&lt;br /&gt;
|1/2 + 0.3&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| +2&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |1/2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| +1.7&lt;br /&gt;
|1/4 + 0.6&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| +1.3&lt;br /&gt;
|1/4 + 0.3&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| +1&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |1/4&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| +0.7&lt;br /&gt;
|1/8 + 0.6&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| +0.3&lt;br /&gt;
|1/8 + 0.6&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|0&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |1/8&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -0.3&lt;br /&gt;
|1/16 + 0.6&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -0.7&lt;br /&gt;
| 1/16 + 0.3&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -1&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |1/16&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -1.3&lt;br /&gt;
| 1/32 + 0.6&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -1.7&lt;br /&gt;
|1/32 + 0.3 &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -2&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |1/32&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -2.3&lt;br /&gt;
|1/64 + 0.6&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -2.7&lt;br /&gt;
| 1/64 + 0.3&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| -3&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |1/64&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Specifications====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Frequency'''&lt;br /&gt;
|340.00 - 354.00 US FCC/IC &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;433.42 - 434.42 MHz - CE&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Channels'''&lt;br /&gt;
|52 Channels over 26 Frequencies - US FCC/IC &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; 35 Channels over 5 Frequencies - CE&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Antenna'''&lt;br /&gt;
|2.7&amp;quot; (6.9 cm) rubberized&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Mounting'''&lt;br /&gt;
|Eight-pin remote socket&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Zone Select Switch'''&lt;br /&gt;
|A-B-C 	 Plus channel &amp;quot;D&amp;quot; if receiving on a MultiMAX channel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Status Indicator'''&lt;br /&gt;
|LED: Green, Amber, Red Status indications&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''USB'''&lt;br /&gt;
|USB Compliant 2.0, Mini-B Connector, 5VDC regulated, 100mA, Pin 1 Positive, Pin 4 Ground&amp;lt;BR&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;DO NOT CONNECT RADIO TO USB WHILE ALSO CONNECTED TO EINSTEIN FLASH.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Operating Temperature'''&lt;br /&gt;
|Above -15° C (5° F) and below 50° C (120° F)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Storage Temperature'''&lt;br /&gt;
|Above -30° C (22° F) and below 85° C (185° F)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Construction'''&lt;br /&gt;
|high impact plastic, rubberized antenna, ''RoHS Compliant''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Power'''&lt;br /&gt;
|Receives power from attached flash&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Dimensions'''&lt;br /&gt;
|4.66&amp;quot; (11.84 cm) long x 1.29&amp;quot; (3.27 cm) wide x .43&amp;quot; (1.09 cm) depth&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Weight'''&lt;br /&gt;
|.77 ounces (21.83 grams)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Requirements'''&lt;br /&gt;
|Must be used in conjunction with a MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 on camera for power control capability.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;May be paired with any PocketWizard transmitter or transceiver for simple triggering.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ian</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=PowerST4&amp;diff=950</id>
		<title>PowerST4</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=PowerST4&amp;diff=950"/>
				<updated>2011-09-02T20:54:23Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ian: /* Compatibility: */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Receiver with ControlTL for Elinchrom RX=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PWPOWERST4A_lbox.jpg|right|200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The PowerST4 Receiver enables remote power control of Elinchrom RX flashes using PocketWizard ControlTL technology.  With a MiniTT1 Transmitter or FlexTT5 Transceiver on your camera and a PowerST4 plugged into your Elinchrom RX flash, you can now adjust the flash power settings [[PowerTracking#Basic Power Control|directly from the camera]]. Add the [[AC3 ZoneController]] and you can control three different zones of lights in 1/3-stop increments with up to a six-stop range.  Utilize PocketWizard’s unique features such as [[HyperSync]] and Optimized [[Rear Curtain Sync]] for maximum control of your lighting.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=center&amp;gt;&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;IAMWxEylEOM&amp;amp;autohide=1|425|240&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Using your PowerST4=&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PWPOWERST4B lbox.jpg|right|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
'''1.''' Connect the PowerST4 to your RX flash pack via the remote port, then power on the flash.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''2.''' Select Zone A, B, or C with the Zone Switch on your PowerST4. Default = A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''3.''' Set up your PocketWizard transmitter and take pictures normally.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Make sure all your radios are set to the same PocketWizard channel.''' See the Learn Mode and PocketWizard Utility sections for more information&lt;br /&gt;
on channels. Default = ControlTL 1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Status LED blinks '''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:green;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Green&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''' every few seconds to indicate normal operation. It will blink '''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Red&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''' in sync with a trigger. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Momentarily pressing TEST/LEARN will test trigger the flash. See the Learn Mode and Reset sections for more information on those functions. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''NOTE:''' The PowerST4 overrides settings you make directly on your flash. If you would like to change the beeper, modeling light, or optical slave mode on your flash, just set those features on your flash before you turn on your camera’s transmitter. You can also adjust these settings from your transmitter via the PocketWizard Utility. See that section for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you would like the flash to simply trigger at the output power you set, and not accept power changes from the radio, follow these steps: ''Make sure to allow a few seconds between each step!''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''1.''' Turn the flash on and change the power level&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''2.''' Then press TEST on the PowerST4.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''3.'''Wait a few seconds for 3 amber blinks from the PowerST4's LED.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To allow the PowerST4 to control the flash features again, turn the flash OFF and back ON.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note:''' When receiving on Standard Channels, the PowerST4 will be unable to do any form of PowerTracking, or remote Manual Power Control. You must be using a ControlTL radio in ControlTL radio mode for the Einstein to be able to engage in any form of ControlTL feature.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
===== [[ControlTL]] =====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:controltl.jpg|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
PocketWizard’s newest firmware platform taps into the camera’s digital communications to enable an entirely new level of remote flash capability through our proven radio system.   [[ControlTL]] allows remote TTL systems as well as [[PowerTracking#Basic Power Control|Manual Power Control]].  ControlTL firmware is configurable and upgradeable for “future-proof” continuous improvement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Manual Power Control =====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:manual_power_control.jpg|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
Adjust the manual power settings of your remote Elinchrom flash directly from a [[AC3 ZoneController]], or master flash mounted on your on-camera [[MiniTT1_and_FlexTT5|MiniTT1 or FlexTT5]].  You can independently control the power output of up to three remote groups of lights (you can have as many lights in each group as you want) from full power down to the lowest setting through the user interface on the back of the master flash or with the dials of the AC3 ZoneController.   Now you can work with total control with your remote lights, without leaving your shooting position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== [[HyperSync]] =====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Hypersync.jpg|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
Our patent pending HyperSync® technology allows photographers to achieve faster X-sync speeds with full power flash.  That extra speed can be used to freeze action or cut ambient light - both of which can produce results never possible before. HyperSync works automatically with the PowerST4.  All you need is a [[MiniTT1_and_FlexTT5|MiniTT1 or FlexTT5]] on camera to gain the benefits of HyperSync. While performance varies by the camera and flash equipment being used, HyperSync will get the maximum possible out of any configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== [[PowerTracking]] =====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:powertracking.jpg|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
When working with certain manual flashes, you can change any of your settings on your camera and the system adjusts for those settings.  Change your camera's exposure compensation to adjust the flash output, or make adjustments in aperture or ISO and the system balances your flash for proper exposure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== [[PowerTracking#Basic Power Control|Basic Power Control]] ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have a ControlTL transmitter like the MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 then you can control your flash’s output level remotely. Add the AC3 ZoneController for even more control.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Read the PowerTracking section for more information on using the PowerST4 when no AC3 is present, or when using an AC3 in Auto Mode. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In AC3 Manual Mode, the AC3 Power Dial sets the flash power output as shown in the table below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; style= border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=5|Elinchrom PowerST4 Manual Power Output Settings&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''AC3 Power Dial&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; in Manual'''&lt;br /&gt;
|'''300RX'''&lt;br /&gt;
|'''600RX'''&lt;br /&gt;
|'''RangerRX/&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1200RX&lt;br /&gt;
|'''2400RX'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| +3&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |5.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |6.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |7.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |8.5&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| +2.7&lt;br /&gt;
|5.1&lt;br /&gt;
|6.1&lt;br /&gt;
|7.1&lt;br /&gt;
|8.1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| +2.3&lt;br /&gt;
|4.8&lt;br /&gt;
|5.8&lt;br /&gt;
|6.8&lt;br /&gt;
|7.8&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| +2&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |3.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |4.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |5.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |6.5&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| +1.7&lt;br /&gt;
|4.1&lt;br /&gt;
|5.1&lt;br /&gt;
|6.1&lt;br /&gt;
|7.1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| +1.3&lt;br /&gt;
|3.8&lt;br /&gt;
|4.8&lt;br /&gt;
|5.8&lt;br /&gt;
|6.8&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| +1&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |3.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |4.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |5.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |6.5&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| +0.7&lt;br /&gt;
|3.1&lt;br /&gt;
|4.1&lt;br /&gt;
|5.1&lt;br /&gt;
|6.1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| +0.3&lt;br /&gt;
|2.8&lt;br /&gt;
|3.8&lt;br /&gt;
|4.8&lt;br /&gt;
|5.8&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;color:white; background-color:#919191&amp;quot; |0&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |2.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |3.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |4.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |5.5&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;color:white; background-color:#919191&amp;quot; | -0.3&lt;br /&gt;
|2.1&lt;br /&gt;
|3.1&lt;br /&gt;
|4.1&lt;br /&gt;
|5.1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;color:white; background-color:#919191&amp;quot; | -0.7 &lt;br /&gt;
|1.8&lt;br /&gt;
|2.8&lt;br /&gt;
|3.8&lt;br /&gt;
|4.8&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;color:white; background-color:#919191&amp;quot; | -1&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |1.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |2.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |3.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |4.5&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;color:white; background-color:#919191&amp;quot; | -1.3&lt;br /&gt;
|1.1&lt;br /&gt;
|2.1&lt;br /&gt;
|3.1&lt;br /&gt;
|4.1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;color:white; background-color:#919191&amp;quot; | -1.7&lt;br /&gt;
|0.8&lt;br /&gt;
|1.8&lt;br /&gt;
|2.8&lt;br /&gt;
|3.8&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;color:white; background-color:#919191&amp;quot; | -2&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |0.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |1.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |2.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |3.5&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;color:white; background-color:#919191&amp;quot; | -2.3&lt;br /&gt;
|0.5&lt;br /&gt;
|1.5&lt;br /&gt;
|2.1 / 2.5*&lt;br /&gt;
|3.5&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;color:white; background-color:#919191&amp;quot; | -2.7&lt;br /&gt;
|0.5&lt;br /&gt;
|1.5&lt;br /&gt;
|1.8/ 2.5*&lt;br /&gt;
|3.5&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;color:white; background-color:#919191&amp;quot; | -3&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |0.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |1.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |1.5 / 2.5*&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |3.5&lt;br /&gt;
|}  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The numbers in the table are within +/- 0.1 stops.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== [[PocketWizard Utility]] =====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pw_utility.jpg|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
Use the PocketWizard Utility software with the on-board USB port to program the PowerST4 to any PocketWizard [[Channels|channel]] and zone as well as many other custom settings.  [[ControlTL]] radios can be upgraded whenever updates and feature enhancements are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Compatibility:===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=3|PowerST4 Series Compatiblity&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Style'''&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Digital'''&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Ranger * '''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|300RX&lt;br /&gt;
|1200RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|600RX&lt;br /&gt;
|2400RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX Speed&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1200RX&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX Speed A/s&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''When using a Ranger RX or Digital RX series pack, make sure to set the flash head in use in the [[PocketWizard Utility]], under the [[Misc Tab]] for optimal [[HyperSync]] performance.''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Note: The PowerST4 is '''not''' compatible with the Ranger RX Quadra. Use a [[Plus II]], [[MultiMAX]], or the P2 port of a FlexTT5 as a receiving radio for that pack.''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*In order to connect to Ranger RX series packs, the PowerST4 requires an Elinchrom female 5-pin to male 7-pin adapter. For longer range performance, and for general use, we recommend an [http://www.bogenimaging.us/Jahia/site/bius/pid/6780?kindOfProductCollectionRequest=productDetail&amp;amp;productCode=EL%2011107&amp;amp;productDescription=Ranger%20Remote%20Cable%208%27&amp;amp;curBrandId=BEL&amp;amp;market=MKT1&amp;amp;product_from_search=true  8' Elinchrom Ranger Remote Cable (Elinchrom Part # EL 11107)]. This will allow for raising the PowerST4 antenna above the pack's ground level position for better reception via a lightstand or other support. For shorter ranges, the [http://elinchrom.com/product/Ranger-EL-Skyport-Transceiver-RX-Adapter.html Ranger RX Adapter, (Elinchrom Part # EL 19374)] can be used. &lt;br /&gt;
*The PowerST4 will connect directly to the 5-pin RX port of Style RX and Digital RX series packs/heads. 5-pin to 5-pin Elinchrom extension cables are available to move the PowerST4 away from the pack/head, if in difficult radio reception scenarios.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=4|Elinchrom RX Cables &amp;amp; Part Numbers&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Elinchrom Part Number'''&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Length'''&lt;br /&gt;
|'''For Use With'''&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Description'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://elinchrom.com/product/Ranger-EL-Skyport-Transceiver-RX-Adapter.html EL 19374]&lt;br /&gt;
|Adapter&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Female 5-pin to Male 7-pin Elinchrom Adapter &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://www.bogenimaging.us/Jahia/site/bius/pid/6780?kindOfProductCollectionRequest=productDetail&amp;amp;productCode=EL%2011106&amp;amp;productDescription=Ranger%20Remote%20Cable%204%27&amp;amp;curBrandId=BEL&amp;amp;market=MKT1&amp;amp;product_from_search=true EL 11106]&lt;br /&gt;
|3.9ft / 1.2m&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Female 5-pin to Male 7-pin Elinchrom Cable &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://www.bogenimaging.us/Jahia/site/bius/pid/6780?kindOfProductCollectionRequest=productDetail&amp;amp;productCode=EL%2011107&amp;amp;productDescription=Ranger%20Remote%20Cable%208%27&amp;amp;curBrandId=BEL&amp;amp;market=MKT1&amp;amp;product_from_search=true EL 11107]&lt;br /&gt;
|7.9ft / 2.4m&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Female 5-pin to Male 7-pin Elinchrom Cable&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://www.bogenimaging.us/Jahia/site/bius/pid/6780?kindOfProductCollectionRequest=productDetail&amp;amp;productCode=EL%2011108&amp;amp;productDescription=Ranger%20Remote%20Cable%2015.7%27&amp;amp;curBrandId=BEL&amp;amp;market=MKT1&amp;amp;product_from_search=true EL 11108]&lt;br /&gt;
|15.7ft / 4.8m&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Female 5-pin to Male 7-pin Elinchrom Cable&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://www.bogenimaging.us/Jahia/site/bius/pid/6780?kindOfProductCollectionRequest=productDetail&amp;amp;productCode=EL%2011109&amp;amp;productDescription=Ranger%20Remote%20Cable%2031.5%27&amp;amp;curBrandId=BEL&amp;amp;market=MKT1&amp;amp;product_from_search=true EL 11109]&lt;br /&gt;
|31.5ft / 9.6m&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Female 5-pin to Male 7-pin Elinchrom Cable&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://www.bogenimaging.us/Jahia/site/bius/pid/6780?kindOfProductCollectionRequest=productDetail&amp;amp;productCode=EL%2011110&amp;amp;productDescription=Ranger%20Adaptor%20Cable%208%22&amp;amp;curBrandId=BEL&amp;amp;market=MKT1&amp;amp;product_from_search=true EL 11110]&lt;br /&gt;
|7.9in / 0.2m&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Female 5-pin to Male 7-pin Elinchrom Cable (Short)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://www.bogenimaging.us/Jahia/site/bius/pid/6780?kindOfProductCollectionRequest=productDetail&amp;amp;productCode=EL%2011100&amp;amp;productDescription=Cable%20Remote%201.2M%205%20Poles%20M/F&amp;amp;curBrandId=BEL&amp;amp;market=MKT1&amp;amp;product_from_search=true EL 11100]&lt;br /&gt;
|3.5ft / 1.2m&lt;br /&gt;
|Style RX, Digital RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Female 5-pin to Male 5-pin Elinchrom Cable&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://www.bogenimaging.us/Jahia/site/bius/pid/6780?kindOfProductCollectionRequest=productDetail&amp;amp;productCode=EL%2011101&amp;amp;productDescription=Cable%20Remote%202.4M,%205%20Poles%20M/F&amp;amp;curBrandId=BEL&amp;amp;market=MKT1&amp;amp;product_from_search=true EL 11101]&lt;br /&gt;
|7.9ft/ 2.4m&lt;br /&gt;
|Style RX, Digital RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Female 5-pin to Male 5-pin Elinchrom Cable&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://www.bogenimaging.us/Jahia/site/bius/pid/6780?kindOfProductCollectionRequest=productDetail&amp;amp;productCode=EL%2011102&amp;amp;productDescription=Cable%20Remote%204.8M,%205%20Poles%20M/F&amp;amp;curBrandId=BEL&amp;amp;market=MKT1&amp;amp;product_from_search=true EL 11102]&lt;br /&gt;
|14ft/ 4.8m&lt;br /&gt;
|Style RX, Digital RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Female 5-pin to Male 5-pin Elinchrom Cable&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://www.bogenimaging.us/Jahia/site/bius/pid/6780?kindOfProductCollectionRequest=productDetail&amp;amp;productCode=EL%2011103&amp;amp;productDescription=Cable%20Remote%209.6M,%205%20Poles%20M/F&amp;amp;curBrandId=BEL&amp;amp;market=MKT1&amp;amp;product_from_search=true EL 11103]&lt;br /&gt;
|28ft/ 9.6m&lt;br /&gt;
|Style RX, Digital RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Female 5-pin to Male 5-pin Elinchrom Cable&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://www.bogenimaging.us/Jahia/site/bius/pid/6780?kindOfProductCollectionRequest=productDetail&amp;amp;productCode=EL%2011104&amp;amp;productDescription=Cable%20Remote%2019.2M,5%20Poles%20M/F&amp;amp;curBrandId=BEL&amp;amp;market=MKT1&amp;amp;product_from_search=true EL 11104]&lt;br /&gt;
|57.5ft/ 19.2m&lt;br /&gt;
|Style RX, Digital RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Female 5-pin to Male 5-pin Elinchrom Cable&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Specifications:====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Frequency'''&lt;br /&gt;
|340.00 - 354.00 US FCC/IC &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;433.42 - 434.42 MHz - CE&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Channels'''&lt;br /&gt;
|52 Channels over 26 Frequencies - US FCC/IC &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; 35 Channels over 5 Frequencies - CE&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Antenna'''&lt;br /&gt;
|2.7&amp;quot; (6.9 cm) rubberized&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Mounting'''&lt;br /&gt;
|Five-pin remote socket&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Zone Select Switch'''&lt;br /&gt;
|A-B-C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Status Indicator'''&lt;br /&gt;
|LED: Green, Amber, Red Status indications&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''USB'''&lt;br /&gt;
|USB Compliant 2.0, Mini-B Connector, 5VDC regulated, 100mA, Pin 1 Positive, Pin 4 Ground&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Operating Temperature'''&lt;br /&gt;
|Above -15° C (5° F) and below 50° C (120° F)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Storage Temperature'''&lt;br /&gt;
|Above -30° C (22° F) and below 85° C (185° F)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Construction'''&lt;br /&gt;
|high impact plastic, rubberized antenna, ''RoHS Compliant''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Power'''&lt;br /&gt;
|Receives power from attached flash&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Dimensions'''&lt;br /&gt;
|3.6&amp;quot; (9.2cm) long x 2.2&amp;quot; (5.5 cm) wide x 1&amp;quot; (2.5 cm) tall&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Weight'''&lt;br /&gt;
|.77 ounces (21.83 grams)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Requirements'''&lt;br /&gt;
|Must be used in conjunction with a MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 on camera for power control capability.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;May be paired with any PocketWizard transmitter or transceiver for simple triggering.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ian</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=PowerST4&amp;diff=949</id>
		<title>PowerST4</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=PowerST4&amp;diff=949"/>
				<updated>2011-09-02T20:53:19Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ian: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Receiver with ControlTL for Elinchrom RX=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PWPOWERST4A_lbox.jpg|right|200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The PowerST4 Receiver enables remote power control of Elinchrom RX flashes using PocketWizard ControlTL technology.  With a MiniTT1 Transmitter or FlexTT5 Transceiver on your camera and a PowerST4 plugged into your Elinchrom RX flash, you can now adjust the flash power settings [[PowerTracking#Basic Power Control|directly from the camera]]. Add the [[AC3 ZoneController]] and you can control three different zones of lights in 1/3-stop increments with up to a six-stop range.  Utilize PocketWizard’s unique features such as [[HyperSync]] and Optimized [[Rear Curtain Sync]] for maximum control of your lighting.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=center&amp;gt;&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;IAMWxEylEOM&amp;amp;autohide=1|425|240&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Using your PowerST4=&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PWPOWERST4B lbox.jpg|right|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
'''1.''' Connect the PowerST4 to your RX flash pack via the remote port, then power on the flash.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''2.''' Select Zone A, B, or C with the Zone Switch on your PowerST4. Default = A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''3.''' Set up your PocketWizard transmitter and take pictures normally.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Make sure all your radios are set to the same PocketWizard channel.''' See the Learn Mode and PocketWizard Utility sections for more information&lt;br /&gt;
on channels. Default = ControlTL 1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Status LED blinks '''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:green;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Green&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''' every few seconds to indicate normal operation. It will blink '''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Red&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''' in sync with a trigger. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Momentarily pressing TEST/LEARN will test trigger the flash. See the Learn Mode and Reset sections for more information on those functions. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''NOTE:''' The PowerST4 overrides settings you make directly on your flash. If you would like to change the beeper, modeling light, or optical slave mode on your flash, just set those features on your flash before you turn on your camera’s transmitter. You can also adjust these settings from your transmitter via the PocketWizard Utility. See that section for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you would like the flash to simply trigger at the output power you set, and not accept power changes from the radio, follow these steps: ''Make sure to allow a few seconds between each step!''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''1.''' Turn the flash on and change the power level&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''2.''' Then press TEST on the PowerST4.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''3.'''Wait a few seconds for 3 amber blinks from the PowerST4's LED.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To allow the PowerST4 to control the flash features again, turn the flash OFF and back ON.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note:''' When receiving on Standard Channels, the PowerST4 will be unable to do any form of PowerTracking, or remote Manual Power Control. You must be using a ControlTL radio in ControlTL radio mode for the Einstein to be able to engage in any form of ControlTL feature.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
===== [[ControlTL]] =====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:controltl.jpg|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
PocketWizard’s newest firmware platform taps into the camera’s digital communications to enable an entirely new level of remote flash capability through our proven radio system.   [[ControlTL]] allows remote TTL systems as well as [[PowerTracking#Basic Power Control|Manual Power Control]].  ControlTL firmware is configurable and upgradeable for “future-proof” continuous improvement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Manual Power Control =====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:manual_power_control.jpg|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
Adjust the manual power settings of your remote Elinchrom flash directly from a [[AC3 ZoneController]], or master flash mounted on your on-camera [[MiniTT1_and_FlexTT5|MiniTT1 or FlexTT5]].  You can independently control the power output of up to three remote groups of lights (you can have as many lights in each group as you want) from full power down to the lowest setting through the user interface on the back of the master flash or with the dials of the AC3 ZoneController.   Now you can work with total control with your remote lights, without leaving your shooting position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== [[HyperSync]] =====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Hypersync.jpg|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
Our patent pending HyperSync® technology allows photographers to achieve faster X-sync speeds with full power flash.  That extra speed can be used to freeze action or cut ambient light - both of which can produce results never possible before. HyperSync works automatically with the PowerST4.  All you need is a [[MiniTT1_and_FlexTT5|MiniTT1 or FlexTT5]] on camera to gain the benefits of HyperSync. While performance varies by the camera and flash equipment being used, HyperSync will get the maximum possible out of any configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== [[PowerTracking]] =====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:powertracking.jpg|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
When working with certain manual flashes, you can change any of your settings on your camera and the system adjusts for those settings.  Change your camera's exposure compensation to adjust the flash output, or make adjustments in aperture or ISO and the system balances your flash for proper exposure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== [[PowerTracking#Basic Power Control|Basic Power Control]] ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have a ControlTL transmitter like the MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 then you can control your flash’s output level remotely. Add the AC3 ZoneController for even more control.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Read the PowerTracking section for more information on using the PowerST4 when no AC3 is present, or when using an AC3 in Auto Mode. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In AC3 Manual Mode, the AC3 Power Dial sets the flash power output as shown in the table below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; style= border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=5|Elinchrom PowerST4 Manual Power Output Settings&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''AC3 Power Dial&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; in Manual'''&lt;br /&gt;
|'''300RX'''&lt;br /&gt;
|'''600RX'''&lt;br /&gt;
|'''RangerRX/&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1200RX&lt;br /&gt;
|'''2400RX'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| +3&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |5.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |6.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |7.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |8.5&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| +2.7&lt;br /&gt;
|5.1&lt;br /&gt;
|6.1&lt;br /&gt;
|7.1&lt;br /&gt;
|8.1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| +2.3&lt;br /&gt;
|4.8&lt;br /&gt;
|5.8&lt;br /&gt;
|6.8&lt;br /&gt;
|7.8&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| +2&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |3.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |4.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |5.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |6.5&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| +1.7&lt;br /&gt;
|4.1&lt;br /&gt;
|5.1&lt;br /&gt;
|6.1&lt;br /&gt;
|7.1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| +1.3&lt;br /&gt;
|3.8&lt;br /&gt;
|4.8&lt;br /&gt;
|5.8&lt;br /&gt;
|6.8&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| +1&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |3.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |4.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |5.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |6.5&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| +0.7&lt;br /&gt;
|3.1&lt;br /&gt;
|4.1&lt;br /&gt;
|5.1&lt;br /&gt;
|6.1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| +0.3&lt;br /&gt;
|2.8&lt;br /&gt;
|3.8&lt;br /&gt;
|4.8&lt;br /&gt;
|5.8&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;color:white; background-color:#919191&amp;quot; |0&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |2.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |3.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |4.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |5.5&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;color:white; background-color:#919191&amp;quot; | -0.3&lt;br /&gt;
|2.1&lt;br /&gt;
|3.1&lt;br /&gt;
|4.1&lt;br /&gt;
|5.1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;color:white; background-color:#919191&amp;quot; | -0.7 &lt;br /&gt;
|1.8&lt;br /&gt;
|2.8&lt;br /&gt;
|3.8&lt;br /&gt;
|4.8&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;color:white; background-color:#919191&amp;quot; | -1&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |1.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |2.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |3.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |4.5&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;color:white; background-color:#919191&amp;quot; | -1.3&lt;br /&gt;
|1.1&lt;br /&gt;
|2.1&lt;br /&gt;
|3.1&lt;br /&gt;
|4.1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;color:white; background-color:#919191&amp;quot; | -1.7&lt;br /&gt;
|0.8&lt;br /&gt;
|1.8&lt;br /&gt;
|2.8&lt;br /&gt;
|3.8&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;color:white; background-color:#919191&amp;quot; | -2&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |0.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |1.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |2.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |3.5&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;color:white; background-color:#919191&amp;quot; | -2.3&lt;br /&gt;
|0.5&lt;br /&gt;
|1.5&lt;br /&gt;
|2.1 / 2.5*&lt;br /&gt;
|3.5&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;color:white; background-color:#919191&amp;quot; | -2.7&lt;br /&gt;
|0.5&lt;br /&gt;
|1.5&lt;br /&gt;
|1.8/ 2.5*&lt;br /&gt;
|3.5&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;color:white; background-color:#919191&amp;quot; | -3&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |0.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |1.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |1.5 / 2.5*&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |3.5&lt;br /&gt;
|}  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The numbers in the table are within +/- 0.1 stops.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== [[PocketWizard Utility]] =====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pw_utility.jpg|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
Use the PocketWizard Utility software with the on-board USB port to program the PowerST4 to any PocketWizard [[Channels|channel]] and zone as well as many other custom settings.  [[ControlTL]] radios can be upgraded whenever updates and feature enhancements are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Compatibility:===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=3|PowerST4 Series Compatiblity&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Style'''&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Digital'''&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Ranger * '''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|300RX&lt;br /&gt;
|1200RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|600RX&lt;br /&gt;
|2400RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX Speed&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1200RX&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX Speed A/s&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''When using a Ranger RX or Digital RX series pack, make sure to set the flash head in use in the [[PocketWizard Utility]], under the [[Misc Tab]] for optimal [[HyperSync]] performance.''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Note: The PowerST4 is '''not''' compatible with the Ranger RX Quadra. Use a Plus II, MultiMAX, or the P2 port of a FlexTT5 as a receiving radio for that pack.''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*In order to connect to Ranger RX series packs, the PowerST4 requires an Elinchrom female 5-pin to male 7-pin adapter. For longer range performance, and for general use, we recommend an [http://www.bogenimaging.us/Jahia/site/bius/pid/6780?kindOfProductCollectionRequest=productDetail&amp;amp;productCode=EL%2011107&amp;amp;productDescription=Ranger%20Remote%20Cable%208%27&amp;amp;curBrandId=BEL&amp;amp;market=MKT1&amp;amp;product_from_search=true  8' Elinchrom Ranger Remote Cable (Elinchrom Part # EL 11107)]. This will allow for raising the PowerST4 antenna above the pack's ground level position for better reception via a lightstand or other support. For shorter ranges, the [http://elinchrom.com/product/Ranger-EL-Skyport-Transceiver-RX-Adapter.html Ranger RX Adapter, (Elinchrom Part # EL 19374)] can be used. &lt;br /&gt;
*The PowerST4 will connect directly to the 5-pin RX port of Style RX and Digital RX series packs/heads. 5-pin to 5-pin Elinchrom extension cables are available to move the PowerST4 away from the pack/head, if in difficult radio reception scenarios.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=4|Elinchrom RX Cables &amp;amp; Part Numbers&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Elinchrom Part Number'''&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Length'''&lt;br /&gt;
|'''For Use With'''&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Description'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://elinchrom.com/product/Ranger-EL-Skyport-Transceiver-RX-Adapter.html EL 19374]&lt;br /&gt;
|Adapter&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Female 5-pin to Male 7-pin Elinchrom Adapter &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://www.bogenimaging.us/Jahia/site/bius/pid/6780?kindOfProductCollectionRequest=productDetail&amp;amp;productCode=EL%2011106&amp;amp;productDescription=Ranger%20Remote%20Cable%204%27&amp;amp;curBrandId=BEL&amp;amp;market=MKT1&amp;amp;product_from_search=true EL 11106]&lt;br /&gt;
|3.9ft / 1.2m&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Female 5-pin to Male 7-pin Elinchrom Cable &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://www.bogenimaging.us/Jahia/site/bius/pid/6780?kindOfProductCollectionRequest=productDetail&amp;amp;productCode=EL%2011107&amp;amp;productDescription=Ranger%20Remote%20Cable%208%27&amp;amp;curBrandId=BEL&amp;amp;market=MKT1&amp;amp;product_from_search=true EL 11107]&lt;br /&gt;
|7.9ft / 2.4m&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Female 5-pin to Male 7-pin Elinchrom Cable&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://www.bogenimaging.us/Jahia/site/bius/pid/6780?kindOfProductCollectionRequest=productDetail&amp;amp;productCode=EL%2011108&amp;amp;productDescription=Ranger%20Remote%20Cable%2015.7%27&amp;amp;curBrandId=BEL&amp;amp;market=MKT1&amp;amp;product_from_search=true EL 11108]&lt;br /&gt;
|15.7ft / 4.8m&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Female 5-pin to Male 7-pin Elinchrom Cable&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://www.bogenimaging.us/Jahia/site/bius/pid/6780?kindOfProductCollectionRequest=productDetail&amp;amp;productCode=EL%2011109&amp;amp;productDescription=Ranger%20Remote%20Cable%2031.5%27&amp;amp;curBrandId=BEL&amp;amp;market=MKT1&amp;amp;product_from_search=true EL 11109]&lt;br /&gt;
|31.5ft / 9.6m&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Female 5-pin to Male 7-pin Elinchrom Cable&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://www.bogenimaging.us/Jahia/site/bius/pid/6780?kindOfProductCollectionRequest=productDetail&amp;amp;productCode=EL%2011110&amp;amp;productDescription=Ranger%20Adaptor%20Cable%208%22&amp;amp;curBrandId=BEL&amp;amp;market=MKT1&amp;amp;product_from_search=true EL 11110]&lt;br /&gt;
|7.9in / 0.2m&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Female 5-pin to Male 7-pin Elinchrom Cable (Short)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://www.bogenimaging.us/Jahia/site/bius/pid/6780?kindOfProductCollectionRequest=productDetail&amp;amp;productCode=EL%2011100&amp;amp;productDescription=Cable%20Remote%201.2M%205%20Poles%20M/F&amp;amp;curBrandId=BEL&amp;amp;market=MKT1&amp;amp;product_from_search=true EL 11100]&lt;br /&gt;
|3.5ft / 1.2m&lt;br /&gt;
|Style RX, Digital RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Female 5-pin to Male 5-pin Elinchrom Cable&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://www.bogenimaging.us/Jahia/site/bius/pid/6780?kindOfProductCollectionRequest=productDetail&amp;amp;productCode=EL%2011101&amp;amp;productDescription=Cable%20Remote%202.4M,%205%20Poles%20M/F&amp;amp;curBrandId=BEL&amp;amp;market=MKT1&amp;amp;product_from_search=true EL 11101]&lt;br /&gt;
|7.9ft/ 2.4m&lt;br /&gt;
|Style RX, Digital RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Female 5-pin to Male 5-pin Elinchrom Cable&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://www.bogenimaging.us/Jahia/site/bius/pid/6780?kindOfProductCollectionRequest=productDetail&amp;amp;productCode=EL%2011102&amp;amp;productDescription=Cable%20Remote%204.8M,%205%20Poles%20M/F&amp;amp;curBrandId=BEL&amp;amp;market=MKT1&amp;amp;product_from_search=true EL 11102]&lt;br /&gt;
|14ft/ 4.8m&lt;br /&gt;
|Style RX, Digital RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Female 5-pin to Male 5-pin Elinchrom Cable&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://www.bogenimaging.us/Jahia/site/bius/pid/6780?kindOfProductCollectionRequest=productDetail&amp;amp;productCode=EL%2011103&amp;amp;productDescription=Cable%20Remote%209.6M,%205%20Poles%20M/F&amp;amp;curBrandId=BEL&amp;amp;market=MKT1&amp;amp;product_from_search=true EL 11103]&lt;br /&gt;
|28ft/ 9.6m&lt;br /&gt;
|Style RX, Digital RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Female 5-pin to Male 5-pin Elinchrom Cable&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://www.bogenimaging.us/Jahia/site/bius/pid/6780?kindOfProductCollectionRequest=productDetail&amp;amp;productCode=EL%2011104&amp;amp;productDescription=Cable%20Remote%2019.2M,5%20Poles%20M/F&amp;amp;curBrandId=BEL&amp;amp;market=MKT1&amp;amp;product_from_search=true EL 11104]&lt;br /&gt;
|57.5ft/ 19.2m&lt;br /&gt;
|Style RX, Digital RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Female 5-pin to Male 5-pin Elinchrom Cable&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Specifications:====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Frequency'''&lt;br /&gt;
|340.00 - 354.00 US FCC/IC &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;433.42 - 434.42 MHz - CE&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Channels'''&lt;br /&gt;
|52 Channels over 26 Frequencies - US FCC/IC &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; 35 Channels over 5 Frequencies - CE&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Antenna'''&lt;br /&gt;
|2.7&amp;quot; (6.9 cm) rubberized&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Mounting'''&lt;br /&gt;
|Five-pin remote socket&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Zone Select Switch'''&lt;br /&gt;
|A-B-C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Status Indicator'''&lt;br /&gt;
|LED: Green, Amber, Red Status indications&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''USB'''&lt;br /&gt;
|USB Compliant 2.0, Mini-B Connector, 5VDC regulated, 100mA, Pin 1 Positive, Pin 4 Ground&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Operating Temperature'''&lt;br /&gt;
|Above -15° C (5° F) and below 50° C (120° F)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Storage Temperature'''&lt;br /&gt;
|Above -30° C (22° F) and below 85° C (185° F)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Construction'''&lt;br /&gt;
|high impact plastic, rubberized antenna, ''RoHS Compliant''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Power'''&lt;br /&gt;
|Receives power from attached flash&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Dimensions'''&lt;br /&gt;
|3.6&amp;quot; (9.2cm) long x 2.2&amp;quot; (5.5 cm) wide x 1&amp;quot; (2.5 cm) tall&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Weight'''&lt;br /&gt;
|.77 ounces (21.83 grams)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Requirements'''&lt;br /&gt;
|Must be used in conjunction with a MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 on camera for power control capability.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;May be paired with any PocketWizard transmitter or transceiver for simple triggering.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ian</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=PowerST4&amp;diff=948</id>
		<title>PowerST4</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=PowerST4&amp;diff=948"/>
				<updated>2011-09-02T20:52:34Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ian: /* Compatibility: */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Receiver with ControlTL for Elinchrom RX=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PWPOWERST4A_lbox.jpg|right|200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The PowerST4 Receiver enables remote power control of Elinchrom RX flashes using PocketWizard ControlTL technology.  With a MiniTT1 Transmitter or FlexTT5 Transceiver on your camera and a PowerST4 plugged into your Elinchrom RX flash, you can now adjust the flash power settings [[PowerTracking#Basic Power Control|directly from the camera]]. Add the [[AC3 ZoneController]] and you can control three different zones of lights in 1/3-stop increments with up to a six-stop range.  Utilize PocketWizard’s unique features such as [[HyperSync]] and Optimized [[Rear Curtain Sync]] for maximum control of your lighting.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=center&amp;gt;&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;IAMWxEylEOM&amp;amp;autohide=1|425|240&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Using your PowerST4=&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PWPOWERST4B lbox.jpg|right|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
'''1.''' Connect the PowerST4 to your RX flash pack via the remote port, then power on the flash.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''2.''' Select Zone A, B, or C with the Zone Switch on your PowerST4. Default = A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''3.''' Set up your PocketWizard transmitter and take pictures normally.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Make sure all your radios are set to the same PocketWizard channel.''' See the Learn Mode and PocketWizard Utility sections for more information&lt;br /&gt;
on channels. Default = ControlTL 1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Status LED blinks '''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:green;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Green&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''' every few seconds to indicate normal operation. It will blink '''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Red&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''' in sync with a trigger. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Momentarily pressing TEST/LEARN will test trigger the flash. See the Learn Mode and Reset sections for more information on those functions. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''NOTE:''' The PowerST4 overrides settings you make directly on your flash. If you would like to change the beeper, modeling light, or optical slave mode on your flash, just set those features on your flash before you turn on your camera’s transmitter. You can also adjust these settings from your transmitter via the PocketWizard Utility. See that section for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you would like the flash to simply trigger at the output power you set, and not accept power changes from the radio, follow these steps: ''Make sure to allow a few seconds between each step!''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''1.''' Turn the flash on and change the power level&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''2.''' Then press TEST on the PowerST4.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''3.'''Wait a few seconds for 3 amber blinks from the PowerST4's LED.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To allow the PowerST4 to control the flash features again, turn the flash OFF and back ON.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note:''' When receiving on Standard Channels, the PowerST4 will be unable to do any form of PowerTracking, or remote Manual Power Control. You must be using a ControlTL radio in ControlTL radio mode for the Einstein to be able to engage in any form of ControlTL feature.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
===== [[ControlTL]] =====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:controltl.jpg|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
PocketWizard’s newest firmware platform taps into the camera’s digital communications to enable an entirely new level of remote flash capability through our proven radio system.   [[ControlTL]] allows remote TTL systems as well as [[PowerTracking#Basic Power Control|Manual Power Control]].  ControlTL firmware is configurable and upgradeable for “future-proof” continuous improvement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Manual Power Control =====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:manual_power_control.jpg|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
Adjust the manual power settings of your remote Elinchrom flash directly from a [[AC3 ZoneController]], or master flash mounted on your on-camera [[MiniTT1_and_FlexTT5|MiniTT1 or FlexTT5]].  You can independently control the power output of up to three remote groups of lights (you can have as many lights in each group as you want) from full power down to the lowest setting through the user interface on the back of the master flash or with the dials of the AC3 ZoneController.   Now you can work with total control with your remote lights, without leaving your shooting position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== [[HyperSync]] =====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Hypersync.jpg|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
Our patent pending HyperSync® technology allows photographers to achieve faster X-sync speeds with full power flash.  That extra speed can be used to freeze action or cut ambient light - both of which can produce results never possible before. HyperSync works automatically with the PowerST4.  All you need is a [[MiniTT1_and_FlexTT5|MiniTT1 or FlexTT5]] on camera to gain the benefits of HyperSync. While performance varies by the camera and flash equipment being used, HyperSync will get the maximum possible out of any configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== [[PowerTracking]] =====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:powertracking.jpg|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
When working with certain manual flashes, you can change any of your settings on your camera and the system adjusts for those settings.  Change your camera's exposure compensation to adjust the flash output, or make adjustments in aperture or ISO and the system balances your flash for proper exposure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== [[PowerTracking#Basic Power Control|Basic Power Control]] ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have a ControlTL transmitter like the MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 then you can control your flash’s output level remotely. Add the AC3 ZoneController for even more control.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Read the PowerTracking section for more information on using the PowerST4 when no AC3 is present, or when using an AC3 in Auto Mode. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In AC3 Manual Mode, the AC3 Power Dial sets the flash power output as shown in the table below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; style= border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=5|Elinchrom PowerST4 Manual Power Output Settings&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''AC3 Power Dial&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; in Manual'''&lt;br /&gt;
|'''300RX'''&lt;br /&gt;
|'''600RX'''&lt;br /&gt;
|'''RangerRX/&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1200RX&lt;br /&gt;
|'''2400RX'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| +3&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |5.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |6.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |7.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |8.5&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| +2.7&lt;br /&gt;
|5.1&lt;br /&gt;
|6.1&lt;br /&gt;
|7.1&lt;br /&gt;
|8.1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| +2.3&lt;br /&gt;
|4.8&lt;br /&gt;
|5.8&lt;br /&gt;
|6.8&lt;br /&gt;
|7.8&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| +2&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |3.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |4.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |5.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |6.5&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| +1.7&lt;br /&gt;
|4.1&lt;br /&gt;
|5.1&lt;br /&gt;
|6.1&lt;br /&gt;
|7.1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| +1.3&lt;br /&gt;
|3.8&lt;br /&gt;
|4.8&lt;br /&gt;
|5.8&lt;br /&gt;
|6.8&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| +1&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |3.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |4.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |5.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |6.5&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| +0.7&lt;br /&gt;
|3.1&lt;br /&gt;
|4.1&lt;br /&gt;
|5.1&lt;br /&gt;
|6.1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| +0.3&lt;br /&gt;
|2.8&lt;br /&gt;
|3.8&lt;br /&gt;
|4.8&lt;br /&gt;
|5.8&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;color:white; background-color:#919191&amp;quot; |0&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |2.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |3.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |4.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |5.5&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;color:white; background-color:#919191&amp;quot; | -0.3&lt;br /&gt;
|2.1&lt;br /&gt;
|3.1&lt;br /&gt;
|4.1&lt;br /&gt;
|5.1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;color:white; background-color:#919191&amp;quot; | -0.7 &lt;br /&gt;
|1.8&lt;br /&gt;
|2.8&lt;br /&gt;
|3.8&lt;br /&gt;
|4.8&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;color:white; background-color:#919191&amp;quot; | -1&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |1.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |2.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |3.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |4.5&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;color:white; background-color:#919191&amp;quot; | -1.3&lt;br /&gt;
|1.1&lt;br /&gt;
|2.1&lt;br /&gt;
|3.1&lt;br /&gt;
|4.1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;color:white; background-color:#919191&amp;quot; | -1.7&lt;br /&gt;
|0.8&lt;br /&gt;
|1.8&lt;br /&gt;
|2.8&lt;br /&gt;
|3.8&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;color:white; background-color:#919191&amp;quot; | -2&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |0.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |1.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |2.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |3.5&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;color:white; background-color:#919191&amp;quot; | -2.3&lt;br /&gt;
|0.5&lt;br /&gt;
|1.5&lt;br /&gt;
|2.1 / 2.5*&lt;br /&gt;
|3.5&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;color:white; background-color:#919191&amp;quot; | -2.7&lt;br /&gt;
|0.5&lt;br /&gt;
|1.5&lt;br /&gt;
|1.8/ 2.5*&lt;br /&gt;
|3.5&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;color:white; background-color:#919191&amp;quot; | -3&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |0.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |1.5&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |1.5 / 2.5*&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;background-color:#A4D3EE;&amp;quot; |3.5&lt;br /&gt;
|}  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The numbers in the table are within +/- 0.1 stops.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== [[PocketWizard Utility]] =====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pw_utility.jpg|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
Use the PocketWizard Utility software with the on-board USB port to program the PowerST4 to any PocketWizard [[Channels|channel]] and zone as well as many other custom settings.  [[ControlTL]] radios can be upgraded whenever updates and feature enhancements are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Compatibility:===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=3|PowerST4 Series Compatiblity&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Style'''&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Digital'''&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Ranger * '''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|300RX&lt;br /&gt;
|1200RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|600RX&lt;br /&gt;
|2400RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX Speed&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1200RX&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX Speed A/s&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''When using a Ranger RX or Digital RX series pack, make sure to set the flash head in use in the [[PocketWizard Utility]], under the [[Misc Tab]].''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Note: The PowerST4 is '''not''' compatible with the Ranger RX Quadra. Use a Plus II, MultiMAX, or the P2 port of a FlexTT5 as a receiving radio for that pack.''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*In order to connect to Ranger RX series packs, the PowerST4 requires an Elinchrom female 5-pin to male 7-pin adapter. For longer range performance, and for general use, we recommend an [http://www.bogenimaging.us/Jahia/site/bius/pid/6780?kindOfProductCollectionRequest=productDetail&amp;amp;productCode=EL%2011107&amp;amp;productDescription=Ranger%20Remote%20Cable%208%27&amp;amp;curBrandId=BEL&amp;amp;market=MKT1&amp;amp;product_from_search=true  8' Elinchrom Ranger Remote Cable (Elinchrom Part # EL 11107)]. This will allow for raising the PowerST4 antenna above the pack's ground level position for better reception via a lightstand or other support. For shorter ranges, the [http://elinchrom.com/product/Ranger-EL-Skyport-Transceiver-RX-Adapter.html Ranger RX Adapter, (Elinchrom Part # EL 19374)] can be used. &lt;br /&gt;
*The PowerST4 will connect directly to the 5-pin RX port of Style RX and Digital RX series packs/heads. 5-pin to 5-pin Elinchrom extension cables are available to move the PowerST4 away from the pack/head, if in difficult radio reception scenarios.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=4|Elinchrom RX Cables &amp;amp; Part Numbers&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Elinchrom Part Number'''&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Length'''&lt;br /&gt;
|'''For Use With'''&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Description'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://elinchrom.com/product/Ranger-EL-Skyport-Transceiver-RX-Adapter.html EL 19374]&lt;br /&gt;
|Adapter&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Female 5-pin to Male 7-pin Elinchrom Adapter &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://www.bogenimaging.us/Jahia/site/bius/pid/6780?kindOfProductCollectionRequest=productDetail&amp;amp;productCode=EL%2011106&amp;amp;productDescription=Ranger%20Remote%20Cable%204%27&amp;amp;curBrandId=BEL&amp;amp;market=MKT1&amp;amp;product_from_search=true EL 11106]&lt;br /&gt;
|3.9ft / 1.2m&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Female 5-pin to Male 7-pin Elinchrom Cable &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://www.bogenimaging.us/Jahia/site/bius/pid/6780?kindOfProductCollectionRequest=productDetail&amp;amp;productCode=EL%2011107&amp;amp;productDescription=Ranger%20Remote%20Cable%208%27&amp;amp;curBrandId=BEL&amp;amp;market=MKT1&amp;amp;product_from_search=true EL 11107]&lt;br /&gt;
|7.9ft / 2.4m&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Female 5-pin to Male 7-pin Elinchrom Cable&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://www.bogenimaging.us/Jahia/site/bius/pid/6780?kindOfProductCollectionRequest=productDetail&amp;amp;productCode=EL%2011108&amp;amp;productDescription=Ranger%20Remote%20Cable%2015.7%27&amp;amp;curBrandId=BEL&amp;amp;market=MKT1&amp;amp;product_from_search=true EL 11108]&lt;br /&gt;
|15.7ft / 4.8m&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Female 5-pin to Male 7-pin Elinchrom Cable&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://www.bogenimaging.us/Jahia/site/bius/pid/6780?kindOfProductCollectionRequest=productDetail&amp;amp;productCode=EL%2011109&amp;amp;productDescription=Ranger%20Remote%20Cable%2031.5%27&amp;amp;curBrandId=BEL&amp;amp;market=MKT1&amp;amp;product_from_search=true EL 11109]&lt;br /&gt;
|31.5ft / 9.6m&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Female 5-pin to Male 7-pin Elinchrom Cable&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://www.bogenimaging.us/Jahia/site/bius/pid/6780?kindOfProductCollectionRequest=productDetail&amp;amp;productCode=EL%2011110&amp;amp;productDescription=Ranger%20Adaptor%20Cable%208%22&amp;amp;curBrandId=BEL&amp;amp;market=MKT1&amp;amp;product_from_search=true EL 11110]&lt;br /&gt;
|7.9in / 0.2m&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Female 5-pin to Male 7-pin Elinchrom Cable (Short)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://www.bogenimaging.us/Jahia/site/bius/pid/6780?kindOfProductCollectionRequest=productDetail&amp;amp;productCode=EL%2011100&amp;amp;productDescription=Cable%20Remote%201.2M%205%20Poles%20M/F&amp;amp;curBrandId=BEL&amp;amp;market=MKT1&amp;amp;product_from_search=true EL 11100]&lt;br /&gt;
|3.5ft / 1.2m&lt;br /&gt;
|Style RX, Digital RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Female 5-pin to Male 5-pin Elinchrom Cable&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://www.bogenimaging.us/Jahia/site/bius/pid/6780?kindOfProductCollectionRequest=productDetail&amp;amp;productCode=EL%2011101&amp;amp;productDescription=Cable%20Remote%202.4M,%205%20Poles%20M/F&amp;amp;curBrandId=BEL&amp;amp;market=MKT1&amp;amp;product_from_search=true EL 11101]&lt;br /&gt;
|7.9ft/ 2.4m&lt;br /&gt;
|Style RX, Digital RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Female 5-pin to Male 5-pin Elinchrom Cable&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://www.bogenimaging.us/Jahia/site/bius/pid/6780?kindOfProductCollectionRequest=productDetail&amp;amp;productCode=EL%2011102&amp;amp;productDescription=Cable%20Remote%204.8M,%205%20Poles%20M/F&amp;amp;curBrandId=BEL&amp;amp;market=MKT1&amp;amp;product_from_search=true EL 11102]&lt;br /&gt;
|14ft/ 4.8m&lt;br /&gt;
|Style RX, Digital RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Female 5-pin to Male 5-pin Elinchrom Cable&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://www.bogenimaging.us/Jahia/site/bius/pid/6780?kindOfProductCollectionRequest=productDetail&amp;amp;productCode=EL%2011103&amp;amp;productDescription=Cable%20Remote%209.6M,%205%20Poles%20M/F&amp;amp;curBrandId=BEL&amp;amp;market=MKT1&amp;amp;product_from_search=true EL 11103]&lt;br /&gt;
|28ft/ 9.6m&lt;br /&gt;
|Style RX, Digital RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Female 5-pin to Male 5-pin Elinchrom Cable&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[http://www.bogenimaging.us/Jahia/site/bius/pid/6780?kindOfProductCollectionRequest=productDetail&amp;amp;productCode=EL%2011104&amp;amp;productDescription=Cable%20Remote%2019.2M,5%20Poles%20M/F&amp;amp;curBrandId=BEL&amp;amp;market=MKT1&amp;amp;product_from_search=true EL 11104]&lt;br /&gt;
|57.5ft/ 19.2m&lt;br /&gt;
|Style RX, Digital RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Female 5-pin to Male 5-pin Elinchrom Cable&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Specifications:====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Frequency'''&lt;br /&gt;
|340.00 - 354.00 US FCC/IC &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;433.42 - 434.42 MHz - CE&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Channels'''&lt;br /&gt;
|52 Channels over 26 Frequencies - US FCC/IC &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; 35 Channels over 5 Frequencies - CE&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Antenna'''&lt;br /&gt;
|2.7&amp;quot; (6.9 cm) rubberized&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Mounting'''&lt;br /&gt;
|Five-pin remote socket&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Zone Select Switch'''&lt;br /&gt;
|A-B-C&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Status Indicator'''&lt;br /&gt;
|LED: Green, Amber, Red Status indications&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''USB'''&lt;br /&gt;
|USB Compliant 2.0, Mini-B Connector, 5VDC regulated, 100mA, Pin 1 Positive, Pin 4 Ground&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Operating Temperature'''&lt;br /&gt;
|Above -15° C (5° F) and below 50° C (120° F)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Storage Temperature'''&lt;br /&gt;
|Above -30° C (22° F) and below 85° C (185° F)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Construction'''&lt;br /&gt;
|high impact plastic, rubberized antenna, ''RoHS Compliant''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Power'''&lt;br /&gt;
|Receives power from attached flash&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Dimensions'''&lt;br /&gt;
|3.6&amp;quot; (9.2cm) long x 2.2&amp;quot; (5.5 cm) wide x 1&amp;quot; (2.5 cm) tall&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Weight'''&lt;br /&gt;
|.77 ounces (21.83 grams)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Requirements'''&lt;br /&gt;
|Must be used in conjunction with a MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 on camera for power control capability.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;May be paired with any PocketWizard transmitter or transceiver for simple triggering.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ian</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=Misc_Tab&amp;diff=947</id>
		<title>Misc Tab</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=Misc_Tab&amp;diff=947"/>
				<updated>2011-09-02T20:51:15Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ian: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Utility Tab Quick Links}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Misc.jpg|500px|center|Misc Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Basic Trigger====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Allows the MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 to operate as a basic PocketWizard radio slave on any camera it will fit, including cameras other than the Canon or Nikon models the radio is designed for.  This mode only uses the center hot shoe contact for sync input and output. It does not use any of the radio's communication pins, and as such disables all TTL, HSS/FP-Sync and power-controlling operations of the radio.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Special Notes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Make sure to double back to the Channels tab after enabling Basic Trigger Mode to set your receiving channel, as the Standard Receive Channel defaults to 32 when this mode is activated.&lt;br /&gt;
* This setting does not need to match across all radios in use - it needs only be used when connected to a non-compatible camera or flash. For example, transmitting MiniTT1/FlexTT5 transmitting on both ControlTL and Standard Channels can be used to trigger a remote FlexTT5 in Basic Trigger Mode (receiving on a Standard Channel).&lt;br /&gt;
* Due to the manufacturer-specific layout of the pins on the bottom shoe, the MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 are not guaranteed to slide onto every camera's hot shoe.  Do not force the units onto your camera.  Slide gently.&lt;br /&gt;
* In Basic Trigger Mode, you get basic remote triggering on PocketWizard Standard Channels.  This works with all PocketWizard radios including the [[Plus II]], [[MultiMAX]], and devices with PocketWizard radios built-in.&lt;br /&gt;
* HyperSync, High Speed Sync (FP Flash), or ControlTL functionality are not available on any channel when using this mode on a transmitting radio. A Basic Trigger Mode remote can still be used for [[HyperSync]] operation, when Standard Channels are configured on the [[HyperSync/HSS Tab]].&lt;br /&gt;
* This mode will reduce battery life with the MiniTT1. Normally the MiniTT1 sleeps when the camera sleeps based on data it receives from the camera on the E-TTL / i-TTL communication pins.  Since those pins are deactivated in this mode, the MiniTT1 never sleeps.  &lt;br /&gt;
* The fastest usable shutter speed for flash (X-Sync) may be affected.  This mode takes ~900 microseconds (1/1111 of a second) from the time X-sync is received until the remote flash begins generating light (radio propagation delay).  Some cameras and flash combinations will tolerate this delay and achieve X-sync normally.  Some will not.  On those cameras that will not, you may need to reduce your shutter speed to something slower than X-sync to eliminate black lines in your images.  Shortening your flash duration may also help.&lt;br /&gt;
* A hot shoe flash or Speedlite in the top shoe of a radio in this mode will only trigger in manual mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Transmitter Only (FlexTT5 Only):==== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Allows the FlexTT5 to be used as a Transmitter only, just like the MiniTT1.  This mode allows a photographer to work in the same area as other photographers, and share remote flashes, without the flash on top of the FlexTT5 being triggered by the other photographers. When this mode is engaged, the FlexTT5 will not respond to any triggers from another MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 acting as a Transmitter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Disable Shoe Communications (FlexTT5 Only):==== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Check this box to turn off the bottom shoe on a FlexTT5. This is useful for remote cameras where you want to deploy the FlexTT5 radio in the shoe, but do not want the FlexTT5 to act as an Auto-Relay transmitter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====SpeedCycler:====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This mode is designed to rapidly cycle through multiple flash units fired individually in sequence. This allows you to fire a camera in sync with flashes faster than a single flash can recycle. It can also be used for triggering remote cameras sequentially. SpeedCycler is engaged on a transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 via this checkbox.&lt;br /&gt;
SpeedCycler mode requires an [[AC3 ZoneController]] in the top shoe of the on-camera PocketWizard radio. Zones A, B, and C will be triggered sequentially and individual zones can be disabled by setting the AC3’s Zone Switch to the off position. Both TTL and manual flash are supported. Setting flash power manually will trigger faster. Receiving [[MultiMAX]]es can be used instead of FlexTT5s provided a Standard Channel &lt;br /&gt;
between 17 and 32 is in use. Make sure to set the Standard Transmit Channel on your transmitting &lt;br /&gt;
ControlTL radio to match the receiving MultiMAX's. The MultiMAX's A, B, and C Zones correspond to the AC3's Zones.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Top Shoe Detection Mode (Canon Only):====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{canononly}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Set this control to AC3/AC9 if an [[AC3 ZoneController]] or [[AC9 AlienBees Adapter]] will be connected to the top shoe of this radio. Set it to [http://www.nissindigital.com/top.html Nissin Flash] to use this radio with a Nissin Di866 or Di622 for Canon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Read more about [[Canon_Compatibility#Nissin|Nissin Flash compatibility here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Camera Model (Canon Only):====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{canononly}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your radio always uses the first trigger of a session as a calibration shot. Some cameras have special considerations that can be accounted for by selecting the Camera Model via this setting. For optimal performance, we recommend selecting your specific camera model. This setting only affects radios configured to transmit when connected to a compatible camera.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Ranger RX Head Selection====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
([[PowerST4]]) Only&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use this setting to select the flash head in use with your Ranger RX series pack.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Digital 1200/2400RX Head Selection====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
([[PowerST4]]) Only&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use this setting to select the flash head in use with your Digital RX series pack.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ian</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=Misc_Tab&amp;diff=944</id>
		<title>Misc Tab</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=Misc_Tab&amp;diff=944"/>
				<updated>2011-09-01T21:59:18Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ian: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Utility Tab Quick Links}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Misc.jpg|500px|center|Misc Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Basic Trigger====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Allows the MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 to operate as a basic PocketWizard radio slave on any camera it will fit, including cameras other than the Canon or Nikon models the radio is designed for.  This mode only uses the center hot shoe contact for sync input and output. It does not use any of the radio's communication pins, and as such disables all TTL, HSS/FP-Sync and power-controlling operations of the radio.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Special Notes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Make sure to double back to the Channels tab after enabling Basic Trigger Mode to set your receiving channel, as the Standard Receive Channel defaults to 32 when this mode is activated.&lt;br /&gt;
* This setting does not need to match across all radios in use - it needs only be used when connected to a non-compatible camera or flash. For example, transmitting MiniTT1/FlexTT5 transmitting on both ControlTL and Standard Channels can be used to trigger a remote FlexTT5 in Basic Trigger Mode (receiving on a Standard Channel).&lt;br /&gt;
* Due to the manufacturer-specific layout of the pins on the bottom shoe, the MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 are not guaranteed to slide onto every camera's hot shoe.  Do not force the units onto your camera.  Slide gently.&lt;br /&gt;
* In Basic Trigger Mode, you get basic remote triggering on PocketWizard Standard Channels.  This works with all PocketWizard radios including the [[Plus II]], [[MultiMAX]], and devices with PocketWizard radios built-in.&lt;br /&gt;
* HyperSync, High Speed Sync (FP Flash), or ControlTL functionality are not available on any channel when using this mode on a transmitting radio. A Basic Trigger Mode remote can still be used for [[HyperSync]] operation, when Standard Channels are configured on the [[HyperSync/HSS Tab]].&lt;br /&gt;
* This mode will reduce battery life with the MiniTT1. Normally the MiniTT1 sleeps when the camera sleeps based on data it receives from the camera on the E-TTL / i-TTL communication pins.  Since those pins are deactivated in this mode, the MiniTT1 never sleeps.  &lt;br /&gt;
* The fastest usable shutter speed for flash (X-Sync) may be affected.  This mode takes ~900 microseconds (1/1111 of a second) from the time X-sync is received until the remote flash begins generating light (radio propagation delay).  Some cameras and flash combinations will tolerate this delay and achieve X-sync normally.  Some will not.  On those cameras that will not, you may need to reduce your shutter speed to something slower than X-sync to eliminate black lines in your images.  Shortening your flash duration may also help.&lt;br /&gt;
* A hot shoe flash or Speedlite in the top shoe of a radio in this mode will only trigger in manual mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Transmitter Only (FlexTT5 Only):==== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Allows the FlexTT5 to be used as a Transmitter only, just like the MiniTT1.  This mode allows a photographer to work in the same area as other photographers, and share remote flashes, without the flash on top of the FlexTT5 being triggered by the other photographers. When this mode is engaged, the FlexTT5 will not respond to any triggers from another MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 acting as a Transmitter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Disable Shoe Communications (FlexTT5 Only):==== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Check this box to turn off the bottom shoe on a FlexTT5. This is useful for remote cameras where you want to deploy the FlexTT5 radio in the shoe, but do not want the FlexTT5 to act as an Auto-Relay transmitter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====SpeedCycler:====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This mode is designed to rapidly cycle through multiple flash units fired individually in sequence. This allows you to fire a camera in sync with flashes faster than a single flash can recycle. It can also be used for triggering remote cameras sequentially. SpeedCycler is engaged on a transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 via this checkbox.&lt;br /&gt;
SpeedCycler mode requires an [[AC3 ZoneController]] in the top shoe of the on-camera PocketWizard radio. Zones A, B, and C will be triggered sequentially and individual zones can be disabled by setting the AC3’s Zone Switch to the off position. Both TTL and manual flash are supported. Setting flash power manually will trigger faster. Receiving [[MultiMAX]]es can be used instead of FlexTT5s provided a Standard Channel &lt;br /&gt;
between 17 and 32 is in use. Make sure to set the Standard Transmit Channel on your transmitting &lt;br /&gt;
ControlTL radio to match the receiving MultiMAX's. The MultiMAX's A, B, and C Zones correspond to the AC3's Zones.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Top Shoe Detection Mode (Canon Only):====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{canononly}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Set this control to AC3/AC9 if an [[AC3 ZoneController]] or [[AC9 AlienBees Adapter]] will be connected to the top shoe of this radio. Set it to [http://www.nissindigital.com/top.html Nissin Flash] to use this radio with a Nissin Di866 or Di622 for Canon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Read more about [[Canon_Compatibility#Nissin|Nissin Flash compatibility here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Camera Model (Canon Only):====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{canononly}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your radio always uses the first trigger of a session as a calibration shot. Some cameras have special considerations that can be accounted for by selecting the Camera Model via this setting. For optimal performance, we recommend selecting your specific camera model. This setting only affects radios configured to transmit when connected to a compatible camera.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ian</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync/HSS_Tab&amp;diff=943</id>
		<title>HyperSync/HSS Tab</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync/HSS_Tab&amp;diff=943"/>
				<updated>2011-09-01T21:18:20Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ian: /* P2 HyperSync Flash Duration */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Utility Tab Quick Links}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:HyperSyncHSS.jpg|500px|center|HyperSync/HSS Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note:''' Triggers on Standard Channels are only transmitted at shutter speeds faster than the camera's x-sync speed if High Speed Sync is disabled for that particular shutter speed. Our radios use HyperSync at the shutter speed immediately higher than the camera's sync speed by default.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, on a camera with a 1/250th x-sync speed, HyperSync will be used at 1/320th, and then High Speed Sync will be used at 1/400th and above in the default configurations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===HyperSync Only (Disably HSS/FP)===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Check this box to completely disable [[High Speed Sync]] and instead use [[HyperSync]] exclusively. A FlexTT5 receiving on a ControlTL Channel will trigger a manual flash at all shutter speeds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===HSS/FP Begins At (HyperSync Ends)=== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the shutter speed where HyperSync Timings are no longer used and High Speed Sync/FP Flash is engaged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, selecting 1/1250th for this dropdown will use HyperSync at shutter speeds up to and including 1/1000th, and begin using High Speed Sync.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===HyperSync Flash Duration For Standard Channels 1 (FAST) to 10 (SLOW)===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These settings automatically take into account the specific shutter timings of your camera, and combines them with an estimated duration of your remote flash.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A setting of 1-3 (FAST) will work best with a flash that has a short duration, like most hot shoe flashes. A 4-7 (MEDIUM) setting would be useful for a medium duration flash, such as an AlienBees B400 or an Elinchrom 300RX, and an 8-10 (SLOW) setting would fit best for a Profoto Acute series, or higher powered Elinchrom or AlienBees flash. Some experimentation may be necessary to find the best setting for your camera and flash combination.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Manual HyperSync for Standard Channels===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Checking this box enables the use of the Manual HyperSync Offset Control. HyperSync Automation is still used in the transmitter to detect your specific camera model's shutter timings. This control adjusts how remote flashes connected to Standard Channel receivers like the [[Plus II]] or [[MultiMAX]] will trigger relative to your camera model's timings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have previously found your HyperSync offset and would like to continue using that method, select this menu option and set the offset with the slider control below. A manual hyperSync value used in the previous production firmwrae is not likely to work, however, and you will need to test again to find your new HyperSync value. This is because of the new HyperSync Automation camera detection, which was not used in previous firmware.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Manual HyperSync Offset (slider)===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This slider is an alternative method for adjusting HyperSync, instead of the HyperSync Flash Duration For Standard Channels control. It lets you manually specify when to trigger a flash (in microsecond) relative to the camera's normal x-sync time. This control is disabled unless Manual HyperSync for Standard Channels has been enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===AC9 Flash===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use this setting to choose the flash connected to a receiving FlexTT5 via an [[AC9 AlienBees Adapter]]. Selecting your flash here will optimize HyperSync for that specific model.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===P2 HyperSync Flash Duration===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This setting controls the automatic timings used by a receiving FlexTT5's P2/Flash port. A setting of 1-3 (FAST) will work best with a flash that has a short duration, like most hot shoe flashes. A 4-7 (MEDIUM) setting would be useful for a medium duration flash, such as an AlienBees B400 or an Elinchrom 300RX, and an 8-10 (SLOW) setting would fit best for a Profoto Acute series, or higher powered Elinchrom or AlienBees flash. Some experimentation may be necessary to find the best setting for your camera and flash combination.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Note that the flash duration of most flashes change as power levels are raised or lowered. While fully automated HyperSync remotes such as the [[PowerMC2]], [[PowerST4]] or AC9 can account for this, the P2 port cannot. This means that the setting in use above will most likely be optimal only for a particular power setting on the remote flash, and may need to be changed for a different power level. We recommend testing at the flash's full power to begin experimenting with your equipment.''&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ian</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync/HSS_Tab&amp;diff=942</id>
		<title>HyperSync/HSS Tab</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync/HSS_Tab&amp;diff=942"/>
				<updated>2011-09-01T21:17:54Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ian: /* P2 HyperSync Flash Duration */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Utility Tab Quick Links}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:HyperSyncHSS.jpg|500px|center|HyperSync/HSS Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note:''' Triggers on Standard Channels are only transmitted at shutter speeds faster than the camera's x-sync speed if High Speed Sync is disabled for that particular shutter speed. Our radios use HyperSync at the shutter speed immediately higher than the camera's sync speed by default.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, on a camera with a 1/250th x-sync speed, HyperSync will be used at 1/320th, and then High Speed Sync will be used at 1/400th and above in the default configurations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===HyperSync Only (Disably HSS/FP)===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Check this box to completely disable [[High Speed Sync]] and instead use [[HyperSync]] exclusively. A FlexTT5 receiving on a ControlTL Channel will trigger a manual flash at all shutter speeds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===HSS/FP Begins At (HyperSync Ends)=== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the shutter speed where HyperSync Timings are no longer used and High Speed Sync/FP Flash is engaged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, selecting 1/1250th for this dropdown will use HyperSync at shutter speeds up to and including 1/1000th, and begin using High Speed Sync.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===HyperSync Flash Duration For Standard Channels 1 (FAST) to 10 (SLOW)===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These settings automatically take into account the specific shutter timings of your camera, and combines them with an estimated duration of your remote flash.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A setting of 1-3 (FAST) will work best with a flash that has a short duration, like most hot shoe flashes. A 4-7 (MEDIUM) setting would be useful for a medium duration flash, such as an AlienBees B400 or an Elinchrom 300RX, and an 8-10 (SLOW) setting would fit best for a Profoto Acute series, or higher powered Elinchrom or AlienBees flash. Some experimentation may be necessary to find the best setting for your camera and flash combination.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Manual HyperSync for Standard Channels===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Checking this box enables the use of the Manual HyperSync Offset Control. HyperSync Automation is still used in the transmitter to detect your specific camera model's shutter timings. This control adjusts how remote flashes connected to Standard Channel receivers like the [[Plus II]] or [[MultiMAX]] will trigger relative to your camera model's timings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have previously found your HyperSync offset and would like to continue using that method, select this menu option and set the offset with the slider control below. A manual hyperSync value used in the previous production firmwrae is not likely to work, however, and you will need to test again to find your new HyperSync value. This is because of the new HyperSync Automation camera detection, which was not used in previous firmware.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Manual HyperSync Offset (slider)===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This slider is an alternative method for adjusting HyperSync, instead of the HyperSync Flash Duration For Standard Channels control. It lets you manually specify when to trigger a flash (in microsecond) relative to the camera's normal x-sync time. This control is disabled unless Manual HyperSync for Standard Channels has been enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===AC9 Flash===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use this setting to choose the flash connected to a receiving FlexTT5 via an [[AC9 AlienBees Adapter]]. Selecting your flash here will optimize HyperSync for that specific model.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===P2 HyperSync Flash Duration===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This setting controls the automatic timings used by a receiving FlexTT5's P2/Flash port. A setting of 1-3 (FAST) will work best with a flash that has a short duration, like most hot shoe flashes. A 4-7 (MEDIUM) setting would be useful for a medium duration flash, such as an AlienBees B400 or an Elinchrom 300RX, and an 8-10 (SLOW) setting would fit best for a Profoto Acute series, or higher powered Elinchrom or AlienBees flash. Some experimentation may be necessary to find the best setting for your camera and flash combination.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Note that the flash duration of most flashes change as power levels are raised or lowered. While fully automated HyperSync remotes such as the [[PowerMC2]], [[PowerST4]] or AC9 can account for this, the P2 port cannot. This means that the setting in use above will most likely be optimal only for a particular power setting on the remote flash, and may need to be changed for a different power level. We recommend testing at the flash's full power with to begin experimenting with your equipment.''&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ian</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync&amp;diff=941</id>
		<title>HyperSync</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync&amp;diff=941"/>
				<updated>2011-09-01T21:12:35Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ian: /* PowerST4 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{recommended reading|High Speed Sync|}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section only talks about HyperSync. Read the section on [[Understanding HyperSync and High Speed Sync]] to learn more about the difference between HyperSync and High Speed Sync.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
HyperSync enables a PocketWizard connected flash to begin firing just *before* the camera triggers a sync pulse. Since you are &amp;quot;triggering faster than a wire&amp;quot; with HyperSync, you can sync at shutter speeds faster than X-sync for many cameras and get more usable flash energy before Auto FP (High Speed Sync) is activated. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When using transmitting and receiving ControlTL radios, HyperSync is adjusted separately on the transmitter and receiver. The on-camera MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 automatically adjusts HyperSync for the best performance and compensates for changes to shutter speed. The receiving ControlTL radio can additionally compensate for flash power level by making adjustments to achieve the fastest possible sync speed with supported configurations, such as a FlexTT5 with an [[AC9 AlienBees Adapter]], a [[PowerST4]], or a [[PowerMC2]]. Some configurations require adjustments via the PocketWizard Utility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All receiving PocketWizard radios, including the [[Plus II]], [[MultiMAX]], and [[Embedded Radios]] will trigger in sync with HyperSync.  HyperSync requires a MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 as a transmitter.  A Standard transmitter like a Plus II cannot trigger a remote FlexTT5 and achieve HyperSync.  This is because the MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 as transmitter actually sends out 2 signals every time it is triggered; one on a ControlTL Channel, and one on a Standard Channel channel. Read more about these different [[Channels]] here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
HyperSync can be customized on a per-flash basis. If you have Multiple flashes of different makes/models, you can now make HyperSync adjustments individually on each receiving FlexTT5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Configuring HyperSync ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using a transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 on your camera, follow the instructions below for your specific receiving PocketWizard radio and then take pictures normally.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Remote FlexTT5 with Speedlite in the Top Shoe ===&lt;br /&gt;
With the default settings, you can sync at any shutter speed. HyperSync Automation will be sued only at 1/320th with Speedlites, after which the transmitting ControlTL radio will switch to using High Speed Sync isntead. On the transmittign radio, adjust the &amp;quot;HSS/FP Begins At (HyperSync Ends)&amp;quot; control under the [[HyperSync/HSS Tab]] to specify the shutter speed at which HyperSync timings are no logner used and High Speed Sync/FP Sync is engaged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Transmitter-side Automated HyperSync will be used at all shutter speeds faster than x-sync until High Speed Sync is engaged. Receiver-side HyperSync automation is not currently supported for Canon Speedlites, as they do not communicate their power level through the hot shoe. For full HyperSync Automation with Speedlites, their power levels must be controlled via a Speedlite in Master Mode or AC3 ZoneController at camera position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== FlexTT5 - Flash Connected to P2 Port ===&lt;br /&gt;
• On the receiving FlexTT5, select the “P2 HyperSync Flash Duration” dropdown menu under the [[HyperSync/HSS Tab]] and choose a duration to match the estimated flash duration of your strobe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Attach the transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 to your camera. Connect the receiving FlexTT5 to the flash and take pictures normally.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===[[AC9 AlienBees Adapter]]===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• On the receiving FlexTT5, select the flash connected to the AC9 AlienBees Adapter in the [[HyperSync/HSS Tab]] of the [[PocketWizard Utility]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Attach the transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 to your camera. Connect the receiving FlexTT5 and AC9 AlienBees Adapter to the flash and take pictures normally.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As of this firmware release, HyperSync Automation is currently implemented for the following Paul C. Buff flashes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;text-align:center;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|AlienBees AB400&lt;br /&gt;
|White Lightning X800&lt;br /&gt;
|Zeus 1250&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|AlienBees AB800&lt;br /&gt;
|White Lightning X1600&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|AlienBees AB1600&lt;br /&gt;
|White Lightning X3200&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|AlienBees ABR800 RingFlash&lt;br /&gt;
|White Lightning Ultra1200&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your flash is connected to an AC9 AlienBees adapter and is not in the list above, try selecting a flash of a similar power level.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===[[PowerMC2]]===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No configuration is necessary. Attach the transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 to your camera. Connect the receiving PowerMC2 to the flash and take pictures normally.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===[[PowerST4]]===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• If the receiving PocketWizard radio is a PowerST4 connected to a Ranger RX series or Digital 1200RX/2400RX pack, choose the Elinchom flash head in use under the [[PocketWizard Utility#Misc Tab|Misc Tab]] in the [[PocketWizard Utility]]. This control is set specifically on the receiving PowerST4. The Ranger S head will offer better HyperSync performance than the A head due to its longer flash duration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Attach the transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 to your camera. Connect the receiving PowerST4 to the flash and take pictures normally.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At present, HyperSync Automation is currently implemented for the following Elinchrom flashes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;text-align:center;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=3 |Elinchrom Flashes&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Style 300RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Digital 1200RX or Digital 2400RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Digital S Head&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Ranger S Head&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Style 600RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Digital 1200RX or Digital 2400RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Digital SE Head&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Ranger A Head&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Style 1200RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Digital 1200RX or Digital 2400RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Mini A Head&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX Speed&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Ranger S Head&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|Digital 1200RX or Digital 2400RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Mini S Head&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX Speed&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Ranger A Head&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|Digital 1200RX or Digital 2400RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with A3000 Head&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX Speed A/s&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Ranger S Head&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|Digital 1200RX or Digital 2400RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with A6000 Head&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX Speed A/s&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Ranger A Head&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your flash is connected to a PowerST4 and is not in the list above, set the remote ControlTL radio to receive on a Standard Channel and configure HyperSync using the HyperSync Transmitter Controls, as described below. Make sure to disable High Speed Sync from the transmitting radio.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== PocketWizard Radio Receiving on a Standard Channel ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
([[Plus II]], [[MultiMAX]], [[Misc_Tab#Basic_Trigger|FlexTT5 in Basic Trigger Mode]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the transmitting radio, adjust the HSS/FP Beings AT (HyperSync Ends) control under the [[HyperSync/HSS tab]] to specify the shutter speed at which HyperSync Timings are no longer used and High Speed Sync is engaged. Triggers on Standard Channels will only be sent at shutter speeds where High Speed Sync is disabled. Transmitter-side Automated HyperSync will be used at all shutter speed faster than x-sync until High Speed Sync is engaged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• For the transmitting ControlTL radio, select the “Flash Duration Selection” dropdown menu under the Sync Timing tab and choose a duration to match the estimated flash duration of your strobe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Attach the transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 to your camera. Connect the receiving PocketWizard radio to the flash and take pictures normally.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• See the [[HyperSync/HSS_Tab#P2_HyperSync_Flash_Duration|P2 HyperSync Flash Duration]] section for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To use HyperSync at any shutter speed up to 1/8000th and never transition to High Speed Sync, check the “HyperSync Only (Disable HSS/FP)” box, also under the [[HyperSync/HSS Tab]].&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ian</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync&amp;diff=940</id>
		<title>HyperSync</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync&amp;diff=940"/>
				<updated>2011-09-01T21:06:01Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ian: /* PocketWizard Radio Receiving on a Standard Channel */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{recommended reading|High Speed Sync|}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section only talks about HyperSync. Read the section on [[Understanding HyperSync and High Speed Sync]] to learn more about the difference between HyperSync and High Speed Sync.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
HyperSync enables a PocketWizard connected flash to begin firing just *before* the camera triggers a sync pulse. Since you are &amp;quot;triggering faster than a wire&amp;quot; with HyperSync, you can sync at shutter speeds faster than X-sync for many cameras and get more usable flash energy before Auto FP (High Speed Sync) is activated. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When using transmitting and receiving ControlTL radios, HyperSync is adjusted separately on the transmitter and receiver. The on-camera MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 automatically adjusts HyperSync for the best performance and compensates for changes to shutter speed. The receiving ControlTL radio can additionally compensate for flash power level by making adjustments to achieve the fastest possible sync speed with supported configurations, such as a FlexTT5 with an [[AC9 AlienBees Adapter]], a [[PowerST4]], or a [[PowerMC2]]. Some configurations require adjustments via the PocketWizard Utility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All receiving PocketWizard radios, including the [[Plus II]], [[MultiMAX]], and [[Embedded Radios]] will trigger in sync with HyperSync.  HyperSync requires a MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 as a transmitter.  A Standard transmitter like a Plus II cannot trigger a remote FlexTT5 and achieve HyperSync.  This is because the MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 as transmitter actually sends out 2 signals every time it is triggered; one on a ControlTL Channel, and one on a Standard Channel channel. Read more about these different [[Channels]] here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
HyperSync can be customized on a per-flash basis. If you have Multiple flashes of different makes/models, you can now make HyperSync adjustments individually on each receiving FlexTT5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Configuring HyperSync ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using a transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 on your camera, follow the instructions below for your specific receiving PocketWizard radio and then take pictures normally.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Remote FlexTT5 with Speedlite in the Top Shoe ===&lt;br /&gt;
With the default settings, you can sync at any shutter speed. HyperSync Automation will be sued only at 1/320th with Speedlites, after which the transmitting ControlTL radio will switch to using High Speed Sync isntead. On the transmittign radio, adjust the &amp;quot;HSS/FP Begins At (HyperSync Ends)&amp;quot; control under the [[HyperSync/HSS Tab]] to specify the shutter speed at which HyperSync timings are no logner used and High Speed Sync/FP Sync is engaged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Transmitter-side Automated HyperSync will be used at all shutter speeds faster than x-sync until High Speed Sync is engaged. Receiver-side HyperSync automation is not currently supported for Canon Speedlites, as they do not communicate their power level through the hot shoe. For full HyperSync Automation with Speedlites, their power levels must be controlled via a Speedlite in Master Mode or AC3 ZoneController at camera position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== FlexTT5 - Flash Connected to P2 Port ===&lt;br /&gt;
• On the receiving FlexTT5, select the “P2 HyperSync Flash Duration” dropdown menu under the [[HyperSync/HSS Tab]] and choose a duration to match the estimated flash duration of your strobe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Attach the transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 to your camera. Connect the receiving FlexTT5 to the flash and take pictures normally.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===[[AC9 AlienBees Adapter]]===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• On the receiving FlexTT5, select the flash connected to the AC9 AlienBees Adapter in the [[HyperSync/HSS Tab]] of the [[PocketWizard Utility]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Attach the transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 to your camera. Connect the receiving FlexTT5 and AC9 AlienBees Adapter to the flash and take pictures normally.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As of this firmware release, HyperSync Automation is currently implemented for the following Paul C. Buff flashes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;text-align:center;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|AlienBees AB400&lt;br /&gt;
|White Lightning X800&lt;br /&gt;
|Zeus 1250&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|AlienBees AB800&lt;br /&gt;
|White Lightning X1600&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|AlienBees AB1600&lt;br /&gt;
|White Lightning X3200&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|AlienBees ABR800 RingFlash&lt;br /&gt;
|White Lightning Ultra1200&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your flash is connected to an AC9 AlienBees adapter and is not in the list above, try selecting a flash of a similar power level.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===[[PowerMC2]]===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No configuration is necessary. Attach the transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 to your camera. Connect the receiving PowerMC2 to the flash and take pictures normally.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===[[PowerST4]]===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• If the receiving PocketWizard radio is a PowerST4 connected to a Ranger RX series or Digital 1200RX/2400RX pack, choose the Elinchom flash head in use under the [[PocketWizard Utility#Misc Tab|Misc Tab]] in the [[PocketWizard Utility]]. This control is set specifically on the receiving PowerST4. The Ranger S head will offer better HyperSync performance than the A head due to its longer flash duration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Attach the transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 to your camera. Connect the receiving PowerST4 to the flash and take pictures normally.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As of this firmware release, HyperSync Automation is currently implemented for the following Elinchrom flashes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;text-align:center;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=3 |Elinchrom Flashes&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Style 300RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Digital 1200RX or Digital 2400RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Digital S Head&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Ranger S Head&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Style 600RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Digital 1200RX or Digital 2400RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Digital SE Head&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Ranger A Head&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Style 1200RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Digital 1200RX or Digital 2400RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Mini A Head&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX Speed&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Ranger S Head&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|Digital 1200RX or Digital 2400RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Mini S Head&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX Speed&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Ranger A Head&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|Digital 1200RX or Digital 2400RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with A3000 Head&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX Speed A/s&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Ranger S Head&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|Digital 1200RX or Digital 2400RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with A6000 Head&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX Speed A/s&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Ranger A Head&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your flash is connected to a PowerST4 and is not in the list above, set the remote ControlTL radio to receive on a Standard Channel and configure HyperSync using the HyperSync Transmitter Controls, as described below. Make sure to disable High Speed Sync from the transmitting radio.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== PocketWizard Radio Receiving on a Standard Channel ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
([[Plus II]], [[MultiMAX]], [[Misc_Tab#Basic_Trigger|FlexTT5 in Basic Trigger Mode]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the transmitting radio, adjust the HSS/FP Beings AT (HyperSync Ends) control under the [[HyperSync/HSS tab]] to specify the shutter speed at which HyperSync Timings are no longer used and High Speed Sync is engaged. Triggers on Standard Channels will only be sent at shutter speeds where High Speed Sync is disabled. Transmitter-side Automated HyperSync will be used at all shutter speed faster than x-sync until High Speed Sync is engaged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• For the transmitting ControlTL radio, select the “Flash Duration Selection” dropdown menu under the Sync Timing tab and choose a duration to match the estimated flash duration of your strobe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Attach the transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 to your camera. Connect the receiving PocketWizard radio to the flash and take pictures normally.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• See the [[HyperSync/HSS_Tab#P2_HyperSync_Flash_Duration|P2 HyperSync Flash Duration]] section for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To use HyperSync at any shutter speed up to 1/8000th and never transition to High Speed Sync, check the “HyperSync Only (Disable HSS/FP)” box, also under the [[HyperSync/HSS Tab]].&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ian</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=Understanding_HyperSync_and_High_Speed_Sync&amp;diff=939</id>
		<title>Understanding HyperSync and High Speed Sync</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=Understanding_HyperSync_and_High_Speed_Sync&amp;diff=939"/>
				<updated>2011-09-01T16:58:51Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ian: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{recommended reading|HyperSync|}}&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section discusses HyperSync and High Speed Sync at a basic level.  Read the [[HyperSync]] section for more detailed information on how to adjust HyperSync for your configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
HyperSync and High Speed Sync both allow flash triggering with a camera at shutter speeds faster than X-sync.  They function differently, however, and it is important to understand how X-Sync and High Speed Sync work to understand what is happening with HyperSync.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== X-Sync ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== A flash directly connected to a camera ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
X-Sync is typically the fastest shutter speed at which your camera can trigger a flash.   A camera triggering a flash at X-sync follows this time-line:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#The camera is triggered by the photographer.  Several milliseconds of [[Lag Time]] pass.&lt;br /&gt;
#The first shutter opens, exposing the digital sensor.  Some microseconds of time pass.  This shutter will stay open for several milliseconds when the camera is set to X-Sync.&lt;br /&gt;
#The camera triggers its PC terminal and hot shoe.&lt;br /&gt;
#Some microseconds of time pass, then the flash begins to emit light.&lt;br /&gt;
#The flash emits light for its [[Flash Duration]].  This can be any amount of time up to a few milliseconds.&lt;br /&gt;
#The second shutter in the camera closes and both shutters reset.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Shutter speeds faster than X-Sync typically have the first and second shutters moving at the same time, or with no delay between the first shutter fully opening and the second shutter beginning to close.  This does not work with normal flash triggering because the second shutter can be moving when the flash is generating light which yields a clipped exposure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your flash has a very long duration, or your shutter is very slow moving, you can get clipping even at X-sync.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== A flash triggered remotely by a standard radio slave ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adding a standard radio slave to the above time line adds additional microseconds between steps 3 and 4.  This additional delay moves the flash triggering moment towards the time when the second shutter will be moving.  If your flash has a very long duration, or your shutter is very slow moving, you can get clipping when using a standard radio slave even at X-sync.  You may have to use a slower shutter speed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== [[High Speed Sync]] ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
High Speed Sync (HSS), also known as Auto FP Sync, allows for triggering at shutter speeds faster than X-Sync.   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;FP&amp;quot; stands for &amp;quot;Focal Plane.&amp;quot;  When the first shutter starts to open, it is exposing the digital sensor, which is the Focal Plane.  FP Sync means triggering the flash just before the focal plane is exposed rather than waiting until shutter is fully open.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
HSS uses a pulsed light technique that generates continuous light from before the first shutter begins to move until after the second shutter closes.  At faster shutter speeds, both the first and second shutters are moving simultaneously, creating a moving slit across the digital sensor.   Since the light appears continuous to the digital sensor, there is no clipping even at the fastest shutter speeds.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
HSS requires a special flash like a Speedlite/Speedlight that can do the pulsed light technique.  It also requires special timing information from the camera called '''pre-sync''' that is communicated through the TTL pins of a camera's hot shoe.   A normal studio flash or standard non-TTL flash cannot perform the light pulse technique, nor does it have the electrical connections required to use the pre-sync information from the camera's TTL hot shoe pins.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An HSS time line would look like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#The camera is triggered by the photographer.  Several milliseconds of [[Lag Time]] pass.&lt;br /&gt;
#Just before the first shutter would open, '''pre-sync''' occurs.  This tells the Speedlight when to begin generating pulsed light as ...&lt;br /&gt;
#The first shutter opens, exposing the digital sensor while the flash continuously pulses throughout the exposure.&lt;br /&gt;
#Shortly after the first shutter moves, the second shutter begins to move.  The pulsed light continues.&lt;br /&gt;
#The second shutter in the camera closes and both shutters reset.  The flash stops pulsing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pulsed light technique cannot emit as much light as a normal flash pulse as it uses a lot of energy to make the light continuous.  This means that your flash must be much closer to the subject to be effective.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== [[HyperSync]] ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A normal flash is much more efficient at delivering light to a subject than an HSS or pulsed flash method.  You can have your flash farther from a subject, or deliver more light to the scene when using a normal flash.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
HyperSync uses the '''pre-sync''' information available in the TTL shoe pins to trigger a normal flash ''before'' X-Sync would occur.  It does this by knowing how much time passes from pre-sync until X-sync.  It can also eliminate the delay introduced by a radio slave.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
HyperSync requires a ControlTL transmitter like the [[Nikon MiniTT1 and FlexTT5]] or [[Canon MiniTT1 and FlexTT5]].  All HyperSync adjustments are made in the [[PocketWizard Utility]] on the [[Sync Timing Tab]] for the transmitting radio only.  Any PocketWizard radio can be used as a receiver and be triggered from the ControlTL transmitter's HyperSync timing.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two methods of using HyperSync to get flash sync at faster than X-Sync shutter speeds, '''peak''' and '''tail'''.  Most flashes generate a tall peak of light when first triggered, then that light fades down to a long tail.  When adjusting the [[HyperSync]] slider you can optimize your HyperSync moment for the peak or for the tail with different results.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Using the Peak ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The '''peak''' method uses the brightest peak of light generated by the flash.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Look at the X-Sync time line above.  Steps 2 and 4 have some wasted time.  Optimizing HyperSync to use the peak capitalizes on this wasted time.  Moving the peak of light to a little bit before X-Sync can save enough time that you can use a shutter speed faster than X-Sync.  As long as the second curtain is not yet moving when the flash is generating its peak of light, you will not get clipping.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Optimizing for the peak is effective for shutter speeds just faster than X-Sync, but not for the fastest shutter speeds of 1/640 and faster.  Some camera and flash combinations can achieve up to 1/500 using this method, some only 1/250, before they encounter clipping at faster shutter speeds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When adjusting HyperSync to work with the peak, you would be working with numbers closer to 0 (zero) on the HyperSync slider because you are only moving the peak of light a little way from X-Sync.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You need either:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*a very short peak flash duration so that the peak of light is finished before the second curtain begins to move.&lt;br /&gt;
*a very long peak flash duration so that the peak of light isn't changing when the second curtain is moving.  It is not likely to find a flash with this kind of duration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are using Speedlites as your flash source, you can optimize HyperSync for the shutter speeds just faster than X-Sync, then use the ControlTL system to switch over automatically to use HSS at shutter speeds where a normal flash would start to show clipping in the frame.  See the [[Sync Timing Tab]] section in the [[PocketWizard Utility]] for information on setting &amp;quot;High Speed Sync (HSS/FP) Begins At:&amp;quot; for your ControlTL transmitter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Using the Tail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The '''tail''' method uses the long tail of light generated after the peak is finished in a standard flash.  This long tail is seen as continuous light for a shutter speed faster than X-Sync.  Optimizing for the tail can often work for the fastest shutter speeds all the way up to 1/8000.  This method delivers much less light to the camera's sensor than using the peak, but depending on your studio flash in use it can be substantially more than what is delivered by a Speedlight in HSS mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To use this method of HyperSync, you need to disable HSS in your ControlTL transmitter.  See the [[Sync Timing Tab]] section in the [[PocketWizard Utility]] for information on setting &amp;quot;High Speed Sync (HSS/FP) Disable Mode.&amp;quot;   If you do not check this box for your transmitter, then you will not be able to trigger your remote studio flash at shutter speeds faster than &amp;quot;High Speed Sync (HSS/FP) Begins At:.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You optimize for the tail by adjusting the HyperSync slider to the left (more negative).  This moves the peak of light such that it is completed before the first shutter starts to open.  Then the flash will only be generating the long tail of light while the shutters are open.  Depending on your flash's duration, it may be difficult to optimize for the shutter speeds closest to X-Sync as those require the longest flash duration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This method is only effective with studio flash.  Speedlites do not generate enough light during the tail to be more effective than using HSS would be.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Factors to consider ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Read the [[HyperSync]] section for more detailed information on how to adjust HyperSync.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are many factors that affect the success of HyperSync.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Flash duration is a critical factor.  Flash duration often changes with power level.  When you are fine-tuning HyperSync, make sure to test across the flash power levels you intend to use so you can see if certain flash durations will cause clipping at any shutter speed you intend to use.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are many factors in a camera that affect HyperSync.  Slower larger shutter blades will make HyperSync less likely to work near X-Sync with peak flash.  Faster shutter blades, smaller sensors, or crop mode can often improve HyperSync success.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A large sensor and fast shutter blade camera like a Canon 1D Mark III may be able to get peak HyperSync at faster shutter speeds like 1/500.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A large sensor, but slow shutter blade camera like the Canon 5D Mark II may only be able to get 1/320 before HSS must be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A small sensor camera like a Canon 50D may be able to get 1/400, even though it has a slower shutter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Triggering a studio flash from the HSS trigger moment ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your FlexTT5 is set to receive on a ControlTL channel, you can trigger a remote studio flash connected to the P2 port right at the HSS trigger moment.  This may yield an effect similar to using HyperSync optimized for the tail, but it is not true HyperSync because you can not fine tune the trigger moment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
==See the [[HyperSync]] page for more information==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ian</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=Template:Treasure_map&amp;diff=938</id>
		<title>Template:Treasure map</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=Template:Treasure_map&amp;diff=938"/>
				<updated>2011-09-01T16:54:31Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ian: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{| style=&amp;quot;float: right;&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; | '''Quick Navigation'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Getting Started]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 Key Features]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Safety Warnings]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Nikon Compatibility]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Canon Compatibility]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Batteries]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[PocketWizard Utility]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Basic Wireless TTL]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Advanced Wireless TTL]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Manual Flash]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[PowerTracking]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Understanding HyperSync and High Speed Sync|HyperSync]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[High Speed Sync]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Channels]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Learn Mode]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Remote Camera Triggering]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Factory Reset]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Status LED]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Mounting]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Long Range Performance]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 Specifications]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[FCC Notice]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ian</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=MiniTT1_and_FlexTT5&amp;diff=937</id>
		<title>MiniTT1 and FlexTT5</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=MiniTT1_and_FlexTT5&amp;diff=937"/>
				<updated>2011-09-01T16:53:59Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ian: /* HyperSync */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:FlexTT5+MiniTT1.jpg|right|400px|PocketWizard Canon MiniTT1 and FlexTT5]]Congratulations on your purchase of the PocketWizard MiniTT1® / FlexTT5® Wireless Photo Control System for Canon or Nikon DSLR cameras and flashes.  You can use the MiniTT1 Transmitter and FlexTT5 Transceiver to control single or multiple off-camera electronic or intelligent TTL flashes.  The PocketWizard ControlTL® System takes the complex TTL data being sent through the camera’s hot shoe and digitally interprets and transmits it as a reliable radio signal. You can now place TTL or manual flashes anywhere to illuminate the scene: Around corners, out-of-sight and in bright sunlight.  The MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 are compatible with any PocketWizard radio for triggering manual flash or remote cameras. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Canon-specific MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 radios work within the Canon E-TTL II system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Nikon-specific MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 radios work within the Nikon i-TTL / CLS system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All references to TTL are exclusively for the electronic or intelligent TTL systems specific to Canon (E-TTL II) and Nikon (i-TTL / CLS), and not film TTL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The terms Speedlite or Speedlight are used interchangeably throughout this wiki.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This wiki contains the latest information about the operation of your radios.  If you would like to download a PDF of this information, [[PocketWizard_Wiki:Books/MiniTT1_and_FlexTT5_Manual|click here]] and follow the instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Operation ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{treasure map}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''To quickly begin using your radio, you might be interested in the Quick Guides or other documentation at [http://www.pocketwizard.com/support/manual PocketWizard.com].'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more detailed information, use the links below to hone in on the specific feature you are looking for.  The links are the section headings.  For example, the words '''Getting Started''' below will take you straight to that section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== [[Getting Started]] ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Information you should know before using your radios.  Also referred to as &amp;quot;READ ME FIRST&amp;quot; information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== [[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 Key Features|Key Features]]====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Learn more about the key features of your MiniTT1 and FlexTT5.  Additional information on features can also be found at [http://www.pocketwizard.com/products/transmitter_receiver/ PocketWizard.com]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== [[Safety Warnings]] ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Information about operating the radios safely can be found here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== [[Nikon Compatibility]] ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Find out exactly what cameras and flashes work with the Nikon-Specific ControlTL radios, and what specific operational considerations are required for your gear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== [[Canon Compatibility]] ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Find out exactly what cameras and flashes work with the Canon-specific ControlTL radios, and what specific operational considerations are required for your gear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== [[Batteries]] ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Battery types, polarity, and life expectancy information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== [[PocketWizard Utility]] ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Connect your radios to your computer via USB and control many aspects of them via the PocketWizard Utility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== [[Basic Wireless TTL]] ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Simple TTL operation instructions.  Use all of your Speedlites as one zone of light with the camera making the exposure decision.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== [[Advanced Wireless TTL]] ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Advanced i-TTL operation instructions.  Control individual zones of light.  Control your remote Speedlights manually from the camera position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== [[Manual Flash]] ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Trigger any remote flash simply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== [[PowerTracking]] ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Trigger a compatible remote studio flash and control its power level directly from the camera position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== [[Understanding HyperSync and High Speed Sync|HyperSync]] ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Learn more about increasing your X-Sync speed using HyperSync.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== [[High Speed Sync]] / Auto FP ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use your Speedlites with your camera's fastest shutter speeds.  See [[Understanding HyperSync and High Speed Sync]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== [[Channels]] ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Channels allow you to work collaboratively with other photographers, or to work with your radios exclusively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== [[Learn Mode]]  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Learn Mode is not required for normal operation of your radios, but if you are working away from the PocketWizard Utility and in conflict with another photographer on your channel, Learn Mode allows you to change channels in the field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== [[Remote Camera Triggering]] ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition to triggering remote flash, your PocketWizard radios can trigger a remote camera's motor drive port.  Relay Mode is covered in this section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== [[Factory Reset]] ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes you just need the settings in your radio to be like they were when you first took them out of the box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== [[Status LED]] ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section covers the various colors and blink patterns used by the Status LED.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== [[Mounting]] ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Radios perform best when mounted properly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== [[Long Range Performance]] ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Optimize range using these techniques.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== [[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 Specifications]] ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Details on radio specifics are found here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== [[FCC Notice]] ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The FCC wants you to know...&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ian</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=Template:Treasure_map&amp;diff=936</id>
		<title>Template:Treasure map</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=Template:Treasure_map&amp;diff=936"/>
				<updated>2011-09-01T16:52:56Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ian: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{| style=&amp;quot;float: right;&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; | '''Quick Navigation'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Getting Started]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 Key Features]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Safety Warnings]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Nikon Compatibility]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Canon Compatibility]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Batteries]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[PocketWizard Utility]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Basic Wireless TTL]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Advanced Wireless TTL]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Manual Flash]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[PowerTracking]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[HyperSync]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[High Speed Sync]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Channels]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Learn Mode]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Remote Camera Triggering]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Factory Reset]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Status LED]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Mounting]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Long Range Performance]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 Specifications]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[FCC Notice]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ian</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=Manual_Flash&amp;diff=935</id>
		<title>Manual Flash</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=Manual_Flash&amp;diff=935"/>
				<updated>2011-09-01T16:51:33Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ian: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{recommended reading|Understanding HyperSync and High Speed Sync|}}&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 can trigger any receiving PocketWizard, including flashes with built-in PocketWizards. They can transmit on any of the 32 [[Channels#Standard_Channels|PocketWizard Standard Channels]] and a receiving FlexTT5 can be used with [[MultiMAX zones]]. You can even trigger E-TTL and manual flashes together.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Remote Manual Flash Control from Camera Position==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use a 580EX II, SB-700, SB-800, SB-900, SU-800, or [[AC3 ZoneController]] as a master unit attached to the PocketWizard on your camera to control manual power levels of compatible flashes connected to ControlTL receivers. The on-camera PocketWizard will communicate with the device in its top shoe and transmit power level changes to remote ControlTL receivers automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that when using an on-camera Master unit to control remote power levels, leave remote speedlights in their &amp;quot;TTL&amp;quot; mode. As ControlTL radios use the flash's TTL systems to communicate with Speedlights - even when controlling the power manually from camera position - setting the flash to Manual as described in the sections below will ''disable'' power controlling ability from your camera.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:manualspeedlite.jpg|400px|thumb|right|A 580EX II in manual mode.]]&lt;br /&gt;
==Triggering Hot Shoe Flashes Manually==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slide a Speedlite or other manual flash into the top shoe of a FlexTT5 for manual triggering without cords. You can also use a manual flash in the top shoe of an on-camera MiniTT1 or FlexTT5. No configuration of the radio is necessary.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Triggering Studio Strobes==&lt;br /&gt;
You can use a receiving FlexTT5 to trigger studio strobes. Use our [http://www.pocketwizard.com/support/cable_finder/ Cable Finder] to find the right cable for lots of different strobes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you’re using a PocketWizard Plus, [[Plus II]], [[MultiMAX]], or [http://www.sekonic.com/ Sekonic Meter]as a transmitter, be sure to set the FlexTT5 to receive on a Standard Channel via [[Misc_Tab#Basic_Trigger|Basic Trigger Mode]]. This can be set in the [[PocketWizard Utility]], under the [[Misc Tab]] while shooting on-location via Learn Mode. See the tutorial on [[Learn Mode]] here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note:''' Do not connect a flash to the camera port (P1) on a FlexTT5. You could damage your radio. This port is for triggering Canon motor drives only and isn’t designed for the trigger voltages used by some flashes.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ian</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync&amp;diff=934</id>
		<title>HyperSync</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync&amp;diff=934"/>
				<updated>2011-09-01T16:50:23Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ian: /* Remote FlexTT5 with Speedlite in the Top Shoe */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{recommended reading|High Speed Sync|}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section only talks about HyperSync. Read the section on [[Understanding HyperSync and High Speed Sync]] to learn more about the difference between HyperSync and High Speed Sync.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
HyperSync enables a PocketWizard connected flash to begin firing just *before* the camera triggers a sync pulse. Since you are &amp;quot;triggering faster than a wire&amp;quot; with HyperSync, you can sync at shutter speeds faster than X-sync for many cameras and get more usable flash energy before Auto FP (High Speed Sync) is activated. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When using transmitting and receiving ControlTL radios, HyperSync is adjusted separately on the transmitter and receiver. The on-camera MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 automatically adjusts HyperSync for the best performance and compensates for changes to shutter speed. The receiving ControlTL radio can additionally compensate for flash power level by making adjustments to achieve the fastest possible sync speed with supported configurations, such as a FlexTT5 with an [[AC9 AlienBees Adapter]], a [[PowerST4]], or a [[PowerMC2]]. Some configurations require adjustments via the PocketWizard Utility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All receiving PocketWizard radios, including the [[Plus II]], [[MultiMAX]], and [[Embedded Radios]] will trigger in sync with HyperSync.  HyperSync requires a MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 as a transmitter.  A Standard transmitter like a Plus II cannot trigger a remote FlexTT5 and achieve HyperSync.  This is because the MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 as transmitter actually sends out 2 signals every time it is triggered; one on a ControlTL Channel, and one on a Standard Channel channel. Read more about these different [[Channels]] here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
HyperSync can be customized on a per-flash basis. If you have Multiple flashes of different makes/models, you can now make HyperSync adjustments individually on each receiving FlexTT5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Configuring HyperSync ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using a transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 on your camera, follow the instructions below for your specific receiving PocketWizard radio and then take pictures normally.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Remote FlexTT5 with Speedlite in the Top Shoe ===&lt;br /&gt;
With the default settings, you can sync at any shutter speed. HyperSync Automation will be sued only at 1/320th with Speedlites, after which the transmitting ControlTL radio will switch to using High Speed Sync isntead. On the transmittign radio, adjust the &amp;quot;HSS/FP Begins At (HyperSync Ends)&amp;quot; control under the [[HyperSync/HSS Tab]] to specify the shutter speed at which HyperSync timings are no logner used and High Speed Sync/FP Sync is engaged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Transmitter-side Automated HyperSync will be used at all shutter speeds faster than x-sync until High Speed Sync is engaged. Receiver-side HyperSync automation is not currently supported for Canon Speedlites, as they do not communicate their power level through the hot shoe. For full HyperSync Automation with Speedlites, their power levels must be controlled via a Speedlite in Master Mode or AC3 ZoneController at camera position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== FlexTT5 - Flash Connected to P2 Port ===&lt;br /&gt;
• On the receiving FlexTT5, select the “P2 HyperSync Flash Duration” dropdown menu under the [[HyperSync/HSS Tab]] and choose a duration to match the estimated flash duration of your strobe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Attach the transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 to your camera. Connect the receiving FlexTT5 to the flash and take pictures normally.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===[[AC9 AlienBees Adapter]]===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• On the receiving FlexTT5, select the flash connected to the AC9 AlienBees Adapter in the [[HyperSync/HSS Tab]] of the [[PocketWizard Utility]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Attach the transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 to your camera. Connect the receiving FlexTT5 and AC9 AlienBees Adapter to the flash and take pictures normally.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As of this firmware release, HyperSync Automation is currently implemented for the following Paul C. Buff flashes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;text-align:center;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|AlienBees AB400&lt;br /&gt;
|White Lightning X800&lt;br /&gt;
|Zeus 1250&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|AlienBees AB800&lt;br /&gt;
|White Lightning X1600&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|AlienBees AB1600&lt;br /&gt;
|White Lightning X3200&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|AlienBees ABR800 RingFlash&lt;br /&gt;
|White Lightning Ultra1200&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your flash is connected to an AC9 AlienBees adapter and is not in the list above, try selecting a flash of a similar power level.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===[[PowerMC2]]===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No configuration is necessary. Attach the transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 to your camera. Connect the receiving PowerMC2 to the flash and take pictures normally.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===[[PowerST4]]===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• If the receiving PocketWizard radio is a PowerST4 connected to a Ranger RX series or Digital 1200RX/2400RX pack, choose the Elinchom flash head in use under the [[PocketWizard Utility#Misc Tab|Misc Tab]] in the [[PocketWizard Utility]]. This control is set specifically on the receiving PowerST4. The Ranger S head will offer better HyperSync performance than the A head due to its longer flash duration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Attach the transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 to your camera. Connect the receiving PowerST4 to the flash and take pictures normally.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As of this firmware release, HyperSync Automation is currently implemented for the following Elinchrom flashes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;text-align:center;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=3 |Elinchrom Flashes&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Style 300RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Digital 1200RX or Digital 2400RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Digital S Head&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Ranger S Head&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Style 600RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Digital 1200RX or Digital 2400RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Digital SE Head&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Ranger A Head&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Style 1200RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Digital 1200RX or Digital 2400RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Mini A Head&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX Speed&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Ranger S Head&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|Digital 1200RX or Digital 2400RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Mini S Head&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX Speed&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Ranger A Head&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|Digital 1200RX or Digital 2400RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with A3000 Head&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX Speed A/s&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Ranger S Head&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|Digital 1200RX or Digital 2400RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with A6000 Head&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX Speed A/s&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Ranger A Head&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your flash is connected to a PowerST4 and is not in the list above, set the remote ControlTL radio to receive on a Standard Channel and configure HyperSync using the HyperSync Transmitter Controls, as described below. Make sure to disable High Speed Sync from the transmitting radio.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== PocketWizard Radio Receiving on a Standard Channel ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
([[Plus II]], [[MultiMAX]], [[Misc_Tab#Basic_Trigger|FlexTT5 in Basic Trigger Mode]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the transmitting radio, adjust the HSS/FP Beings AT (HyperSync Ends) control under the [[HyperSync/HSS tab]] to specify the shutter speed at which HyperSync Timings are no longer used and High Speed Sync is engaged. Triggers on Standard Channels will only be sent at shutter speeds where High Speed Sync is disabled. Transmitter-side Automated HyperSync will be used at all shutter speed faster than x-sync until High Speed Sync is engaged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• For the transmitting ControlTL radio, select the “Flash Duration Selection” dropdown menu under the Sync Timing tab and choose a duration to match the estimated flash duration of your strobe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Attach the transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 to your camera. Connect the receiving PocketWizard radio to the flash and take pictures normally.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• See the P2 HyperSync Flash Duration section for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To use HyperSync at any shutter speed up to 1/8000th and never transition to High Speed Sync, check the “HyperSync Only (Disable HSS/FP)” box, also under the [[HyperSync/HSS Tab]].&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ian</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync&amp;diff=933</id>
		<title>HyperSync</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync&amp;diff=933"/>
				<updated>2011-09-01T16:50:05Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ian: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{recommended reading|High Speed Sync|}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section only talks about HyperSync. Read the section on [[Understanding HyperSync and High Speed Sync]] to learn more about the difference between HyperSync and High Speed Sync.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
HyperSync enables a PocketWizard connected flash to begin firing just *before* the camera triggers a sync pulse. Since you are &amp;quot;triggering faster than a wire&amp;quot; with HyperSync, you can sync at shutter speeds faster than X-sync for many cameras and get more usable flash energy before Auto FP (High Speed Sync) is activated. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When using transmitting and receiving ControlTL radios, HyperSync is adjusted separately on the transmitter and receiver. The on-camera MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 automatically adjusts HyperSync for the best performance and compensates for changes to shutter speed. The receiving ControlTL radio can additionally compensate for flash power level by making adjustments to achieve the fastest possible sync speed with supported configurations, such as a FlexTT5 with an [[AC9 AlienBees Adapter]], a [[PowerST4]], or a [[PowerMC2]]. Some configurations require adjustments via the PocketWizard Utility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All receiving PocketWizard radios, including the [[Plus II]], [[MultiMAX]], and [[Embedded Radios]] will trigger in sync with HyperSync.  HyperSync requires a MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 as a transmitter.  A Standard transmitter like a Plus II cannot trigger a remote FlexTT5 and achieve HyperSync.  This is because the MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 as transmitter actually sends out 2 signals every time it is triggered; one on a ControlTL Channel, and one on a Standard Channel channel. Read more about these different [[Channels]] here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
HyperSync can be customized on a per-flash basis. If you have Multiple flashes of different makes/models, you can now make HyperSync adjustments individually on each receiving FlexTT5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Configuring HyperSync ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using a transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 on your camera, follow the instructions below for your specific receiving PocketWizard radio and then take pictures normally.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Remote FlexTT5 with Speedlite in the Top Shoe ===&lt;br /&gt;
With the default settings, you can sync at any shutter speed. HyperSync Automation will be sued only at 1/320th with Speedlites, after which the transmitting ControlTL radio will switch to using High Speed Sync isntead. On the transmittign radio, adjust the &amp;quot;HSS/FP Begins At (HyperSync Ends)&amp;quot; control under the [[HyperSync/HSS]] tab to specify the shutter speed at which HyperSync timings are no logner used and High Speed Sync/FP Sync is engaged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Transmitter-side Automated HyperSync will be used at all shutter speeds faster than x-sync until High Speed Sync is engaged. Receiver-side HyperSync automation is not currently supported for Canon Speedlites, as they do not communicate their power level through the hot shoe. For full HyperSync Automation with Speedlites, their power levels must be controlled via a Speedlite in Master Mode or AC3 ZoneController at camera position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== FlexTT5 - Flash Connected to P2 Port ===&lt;br /&gt;
• On the receiving FlexTT5, select the “P2 HyperSync Flash Duration” dropdown menu under the [[HyperSync/HSS Tab]] and choose a duration to match the estimated flash duration of your strobe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Attach the transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 to your camera. Connect the receiving FlexTT5 to the flash and take pictures normally.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===[[AC9 AlienBees Adapter]]===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• On the receiving FlexTT5, select the flash connected to the AC9 AlienBees Adapter in the [[HyperSync/HSS Tab]] of the [[PocketWizard Utility]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Attach the transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 to your camera. Connect the receiving FlexTT5 and AC9 AlienBees Adapter to the flash and take pictures normally.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As of this firmware release, HyperSync Automation is currently implemented for the following Paul C. Buff flashes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;text-align:center;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|AlienBees AB400&lt;br /&gt;
|White Lightning X800&lt;br /&gt;
|Zeus 1250&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|AlienBees AB800&lt;br /&gt;
|White Lightning X1600&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|AlienBees AB1600&lt;br /&gt;
|White Lightning X3200&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|AlienBees ABR800 RingFlash&lt;br /&gt;
|White Lightning Ultra1200&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your flash is connected to an AC9 AlienBees adapter and is not in the list above, try selecting a flash of a similar power level.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===[[PowerMC2]]===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No configuration is necessary. Attach the transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 to your camera. Connect the receiving PowerMC2 to the flash and take pictures normally.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===[[PowerST4]]===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• If the receiving PocketWizard radio is a PowerST4 connected to a Ranger RX series or Digital 1200RX/2400RX pack, choose the Elinchom flash head in use under the [[PocketWizard Utility#Misc Tab|Misc Tab]] in the [[PocketWizard Utility]]. This control is set specifically on the receiving PowerST4. The Ranger S head will offer better HyperSync performance than the A head due to its longer flash duration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Attach the transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 to your camera. Connect the receiving PowerST4 to the flash and take pictures normally.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As of this firmware release, HyperSync Automation is currently implemented for the following Elinchrom flashes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;text-align:center;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=3 |Elinchrom Flashes&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Style 300RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Digital 1200RX or Digital 2400RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Digital S Head&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Ranger S Head&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Style 600RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Digital 1200RX or Digital 2400RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Digital SE Head&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Ranger A Head&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Style 1200RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Digital 1200RX or Digital 2400RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Mini A Head&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX Speed&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Ranger S Head&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|Digital 1200RX or Digital 2400RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Mini S Head&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX Speed&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Ranger A Head&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|Digital 1200RX or Digital 2400RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with A3000 Head&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX Speed A/s&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Ranger S Head&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|Digital 1200RX or Digital 2400RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with A6000 Head&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX Speed A/s&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Ranger A Head&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your flash is connected to a PowerST4 and is not in the list above, set the remote ControlTL radio to receive on a Standard Channel and configure HyperSync using the HyperSync Transmitter Controls, as described below. Make sure to disable High Speed Sync from the transmitting radio.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== PocketWizard Radio Receiving on a Standard Channel ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
([[Plus II]], [[MultiMAX]], [[Misc_Tab#Basic_Trigger|FlexTT5 in Basic Trigger Mode]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the transmitting radio, adjust the HSS/FP Beings AT (HyperSync Ends) control under the [[HyperSync/HSS tab]] to specify the shutter speed at which HyperSync Timings are no longer used and High Speed Sync is engaged. Triggers on Standard Channels will only be sent at shutter speeds where High Speed Sync is disabled. Transmitter-side Automated HyperSync will be used at all shutter speed faster than x-sync until High Speed Sync is engaged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• For the transmitting ControlTL radio, select the “Flash Duration Selection” dropdown menu under the Sync Timing tab and choose a duration to match the estimated flash duration of your strobe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Attach the transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 to your camera. Connect the receiving PocketWizard radio to the flash and take pictures normally.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• See the P2 HyperSync Flash Duration section for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To use HyperSync at any shutter speed up to 1/8000th and never transition to High Speed Sync, check the “HyperSync Only (Disable HSS/FP)” box, also under the [[HyperSync/HSS Tab]].&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ian</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=Embedded_Radios&amp;diff=932</id>
		<title>Embedded Radios</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=Embedded_Radios&amp;diff=932"/>
				<updated>2011-09-01T16:47:12Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ian: Created page with &amp;quot;Read more about PocketWizard radios embedded in flashes and light meters here: [http://www.pocketwizard.com/products/solution/ PocketWizard Integrated Solutions]&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Read more about PocketWizard radios embedded in flashes and light meters here: [http://www.pocketwizard.com/products/solution/ PocketWizard Integrated Solutions]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ian</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=Manual_Flash&amp;diff=931</id>
		<title>Manual Flash</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=Manual_Flash&amp;diff=931"/>
				<updated>2011-09-01T16:41:05Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ian: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{recommended reading|HyperSync|}}&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 can trigger any receiving PocketWizard, including flashes with built-in PocketWizards. They can transmit on any of the 32 [[Channels#Standard_Channels|PocketWizard Standard Channels]] and a receiving FlexTT5 can be used with [[MultiMAX zones]]. You can even trigger E-TTL and manual flashes together.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Remote Manual Flash Control from Camera Position==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use a 580EX II, SB-700, SB-800, SB-900, SU-800, or [[AC3 ZoneController]] as a master unit attached to the PocketWizard on your camera to control manual power levels of compatible flashes connected to ControlTL receivers. The on-camera PocketWizard will communicate with the device in its top shoe and transmit power level changes to remote ControlTL receivers automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that when using an on-camera Master unit to control remote power levels, leave remote speedlights in their &amp;quot;TTL&amp;quot; mode. As ControlTL radios use the flash's TTL systems to communicate with Speedlights - even when controlling the power manually from camera position - setting the flash to Manual as described in the sections below will ''disable'' power controlling ability from your camera.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:manualspeedlite.jpg|400px|thumb|right|A 580EX II in manual mode.]]&lt;br /&gt;
==Triggering Hot Shoe Flashes Manually==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slide a Speedlite or other manual flash into the top shoe of a FlexTT5 for manual triggering without cords. You can also use a manual flash in the top shoe of an on-camera MiniTT1 or FlexTT5. No configuration of the radio is necessary.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Triggering Studio Strobes==&lt;br /&gt;
You can use a receiving FlexTT5 to trigger studio strobes. Use our [http://www.pocketwizard.com/support/cable_finder/ Cable Finder] to find the right cable for lots of different strobes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you’re using a PocketWizard Plus, [[Plus II]], [[MultiMAX]], or [http://www.sekonic.com/ Sekonic Meter]as a transmitter, be sure to set the FlexTT5 to receive on a Standard Channel via [[Misc_Tab#Basic_Trigger|Basic Trigger Mode]]. This can be set in the [[PocketWizard Utility]], under the [[Misc Tab]] while shooting on-location via Learn Mode. See the tutorial on [[Learn Mode]] here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note:''' Do not connect a flash to the camera port (P1) on a FlexTT5. You could damage your radio. This port is for triggering Canon motor drives only and isn’t designed for the trigger voltages used by some flashes.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ian</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=Template:Treasure_map&amp;diff=930</id>
		<title>Template:Treasure map</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=Template:Treasure_map&amp;diff=930"/>
				<updated>2011-09-01T16:21:32Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ian: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{| style=&amp;quot;float: right;&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; | '''Quick Navigation'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Getting Started]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[MiniTT1_and_FlexTT5_Key_Features]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Safety Warnings]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Nikon Compatibility]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Canon Compatibility]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Batteries]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[PocketWizard Utility]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Basic Wireless TTL]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Advanced Wireless TTL]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Manual Flash]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[PowerTracking]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[HyperSync]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[High Speed Sync]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Channels]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Learn Mode]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Remote Camera Triggering]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Factory Reset]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Status LED]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Mounting]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Long Range Performance]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 Specifications]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[FCC Notice]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ian</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=PocketWizard_Wiki:Books/MiniTT1_and_FlexTT5_Manual&amp;diff=929</id>
		<title>PocketWizard Wiki:Books/MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 Manual</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=PocketWizard_Wiki:Books/MiniTT1_and_FlexTT5_Manual&amp;diff=929"/>
				<updated>2011-09-01T15:31:26Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ian: /* MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 Manual */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{saved_book}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 Manual ==&lt;br /&gt;
:[[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 Key Features]]&lt;br /&gt;
;First Steps&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Getting Started]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Batteries]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Safety Warnings]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Status LED]]&lt;br /&gt;
;Compatibility&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Canon Compatibility]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Nikon Compatibility]]&lt;br /&gt;
;Channels&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Channels]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Channels (CE/Europe)]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Learn Mode]]&lt;br /&gt;
;TTL&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Basic Wireless TTL]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Advanced Wireless TTL]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[High Speed Sync]]&lt;br /&gt;
;Manual Flash&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Manual Flash]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[PowerTracking]]&lt;br /&gt;
;HyperSync&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Understanding HyperSync and High Speed Sync]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[HyperSync]]&lt;br /&gt;
;AC3 ZoneController&lt;br /&gt;
:[[AC3 ZoneController]]&lt;br /&gt;
;Utility&lt;br /&gt;
:[[PocketWizard Utility]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Factory Reset]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Update Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Channel Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Flash Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[HyperSync/HSS Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[PowerTracking Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Modeling Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Sleep Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Misc Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
;More Information&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Remote Camera Triggering]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Relay Mode]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[ControlTL Accessories]]&lt;br /&gt;
;Even More Information&lt;br /&gt;
:[[The FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Long Range Performance]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Beta Firmware]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Mounting]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Compliance]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Books|Books/MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 Manual]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ian</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=Long_Range_Performance&amp;diff=928</id>
		<title>Long Range Performance</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=Long_Range_Performance&amp;diff=928"/>
				<updated>2011-09-01T15:26:10Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ian: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{recommended reading|MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 Specifications|}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{ Annotated image |float=right| caption=Antenna performance comparisons.&lt;br /&gt;
| image=LongRangePerformanceGraphic.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Long distance performance from your PocketWizards depends on the orientation and position of the radios.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Whenever possible, try to maintain a line of sight between the radios and keep the antennas parallel. While radio does not require line of sight, it does help dramatically.  Make sure the radios are not near any large metal, concrete, or high water-content objects. People and trees are mostly water!  Make sure they are not blocked by these objects or by hills.  Do not mount the radios close to the ground – try to have them several feet above the Earth or building floors whenever possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Maintain at least 36&amp;quot; (~ 1 meter) distance between antennas. Avoid direct antenna contact with anything metallic. “Dead spots” have a number of causes, but the solution is usually the same: move the radio a few inches or feet away from the problem area. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''SPECIAL NOTE''''':  Some Canon flash models emit RF interference that can reduce the effective operating range of many radio slaves, including the FlexTT5.  Those models include: 430 EX, 580EX, 580EX II and others. See the [[Canon Compatibility]] page for more information.  For those model flashes, please consider the mounting suggestions in the pictures above to optimize range.  If using Canon’s off shoe cord OC-E3, consider adding a ferrite clamp on the cable near the flash to further increase range.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Range Extending Options=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Orientation==&lt;br /&gt;
'''Solutions for improved range performance with the Canon 430EX, 580EX and 580EX II flashes.''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- These flashes emit high levels of RF interference.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- The Canon 430EX II, 550EX, 420EX and 270EX have excellent range because they do not have high RF noise emissions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every electronic device emits some amount of unintended radio frequency(RF) noise.  These emissions can range from very little to a lot depending on many factors.  This noise can be troublesome for any radio device that depends on receiving radio signals because the RF noise may make it harder for the device to hear the incoming signal.  It’s the same as trying to listen to someone talk at a party when everyone around you is talking at the same time and the noise level is very high.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{ Annotated image |float=right| caption=AC5 on a Canon 580 EX II.&lt;br /&gt;
| image=AC5_image.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
| image-width=224&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A few Canon flashes, including the popular 580EX II, 580EX and 430EX, emit strong RF noise across the frequency range used by PocketWizard radios, impacting both the FCC 344MHz radios used in the American market and the CE 433MHz radios used in Europe and other international markets.&lt;br /&gt;
This interference significantly impedes the out-of-box range performance of the FlexTT5 Transceiver.   We have found that the amount of interference varies from flash to flash so it is impossible to say precisely what the impact is.  In our testing, we found some 580EX II's worked consistently on an FCC 344MHz FlexTT5 Transceiver in the upright position at 100 feet (33 meters) or more. However, some flashes we tested were noisier and in the worst-case scenarios, without any intervening steps to improve range, consistent working range was reduced to 30 feet (10 meters). &lt;br /&gt;
There are several ways to improve signal reception and thus increasing the range performance of the radios. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Range Improvement Solutions - FlexTT5 Transceiver:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''  Read More About Internal Modification to Canon 580EX II reduces RF emissions.[http://www.pocketwizard.com/support/tech_bulletins/580exii_mod/ here].'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''The AC5 RF Soft Shield is now available, this is your first line of defense against noisey flashes.  With the AC5 correctly installed, your range will increase substantially.  For information on how to properly install the the AC5, click [http://www.pocketwizard.com/inspirations/tutorials/ac5_install/ here].'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Use the default C2 setting on the receiving FlexTT5 Transceiver===&lt;br /&gt;
This channel uses a different frequency than C1 and may reduce RF noise interference and increase range from 10 to 30%.  You can also try other channels that operate at different frequencies, especially around 345 to 347 MHz, which include channels 2, 4, 5, 6 &amp;amp; 20.  A channel frequency guide can be found on the [[Channels|Channels page.]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Use a FlexTT5 Transceiver as your transmitter and your receiver.===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As a transmitter, the FlexTT5 Transceiver has a more optimize-able antenna than the MiniTT1 Transmitter and will improve range up to 20%.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
===Straighten out the flash head.===&lt;br /&gt;
Lay it on its side and put the antenna in a 180º position.  This should increase range from 50 to 100%. &lt;br /&gt;
                    &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{ Annotated image |float=left| caption=Better&lt;br /&gt;
| image=Flash_straight_out.jpg &lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{ Annotated image |float=left| caption=Best&lt;br /&gt;
| image=Flash_best.jpg &lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Orient your antenna so that the tip of the antenna is a vertical straight line with the opposite corner of the FlexTT5 Transceiver.===  &lt;br /&gt;
Yes, it's a bit contorted but it works.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{ Annotated image |float=left| caption=Optimal Antenna Position&lt;br /&gt;
| image=FlexOptimal.jpg &lt;br /&gt;
| image-width=151&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Hardware Options=&lt;br /&gt;
==Use a Canon OC-E3 cord.==&lt;br /&gt;
Ideally, use the cord with a ferrite choke added to the end of the cord nearest the flash, to separate the flash from the FlexTT5 Transceiver.&lt;br /&gt;
For best performance, the FlexTT5 should be 18” or more away from the flash and ideally positioned above it (the higher the radio, the better the reception). For best results, the FlexTT5 should be positioned at least five feet off the ground.  This should increase range from 200 to 500%.   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{ Annotated image |float=left| caption=Better&lt;br /&gt;
| image=Flex_below_flash.jpg‎&lt;br /&gt;
| image-width= 200&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{ Annotated image |float=left| caption=Best&lt;br /&gt;
| image=Flex_above_flash.jpg &lt;br /&gt;
| image-width= 200&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{ Annotated image |float=left| caption=Ferrite Choke&lt;br /&gt;
| image=564Optimize-0318.jpg‎  &lt;br /&gt;
| image-width= 200&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Mount your flash on one light stand and your FlexTT5 Transceiver on another stand.==&lt;br /&gt;
Just be sure there is at least 18&amp;quot; between the Flash and the FlexTT5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Use a wide dual light bracket to separate the FlexTT5 Transciever from the flash. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{ Annotated image |float=left| caption=Dual Flash Bracket with OC-E3 cord.&lt;br /&gt;
| image=Dualflashbracket.jpg &lt;br /&gt;
| image-width=250&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
- Use a Manfrotto Superclamp and Flexible Arm attached to a light stand, as seen here when used with a softbox.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{ Annotated image |float=left |caption=Rear View.&lt;br /&gt;
| image=Flashsoftbox2.jpg‎  &lt;br /&gt;
| image-width=250&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{ Annotated image |float=left |caption= Front view.&lt;br /&gt;
| image=Flashsoftbox.jpg‎  &lt;br /&gt;
| image-width=250&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Use flashes that have no noise issues.==&lt;br /&gt;
{{ Annotated image |float=right| caption=270EX Speedlite.&lt;br /&gt;
| image=270EX.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
| image-width=150}}&lt;br /&gt;
These flashes include the 430EX II,  550EX and the 270EX. The 430EX II provides almost as much light as the bigger 580EX II. This flash is smaller and less expensive then the 580EX II.  Another alternative is the 270EX flash.  The range of this flash is almost as good as the 430EX II.  It is compact and easy to carry with the FlexTT5. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Use a PocketWizard designed AC7 Hard Shield for Canon Speedlites.==&lt;br /&gt;
{{ Annotated image |float=right| caption=AC7 Hard Shield.&lt;br /&gt;
| image=AC7.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
| image-width=200}}&lt;br /&gt;
To enhance the ControlTL™ System range performance when paired with the Canon 580EX, 580EX II and 430EX flashes, PocketWizard developed the AC7 Hard Shield. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The body of the AC7 Hard Shield is made with a material that effectively blocks RF interference (EMI) from clouding the FlexTT5 antenna.  To block noise traveling through  connections in the hot shoe, an electronic filter has been added to a hot shoe built into the AC7.  Combined, the AC7 shield allows the FlexTT5 to receive transmissions at distances 300 to 500% farther then before and well within the range of most off-camera lighting needs.  [http://www.pocketwizard.com/products/transmitter_receiver/ac7%20rf%20hard%20shield/ Read more...]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Use a PocketWizard designed AC5 Soft Shield for Canon Speedlites.==&lt;br /&gt;
{{ Annotated image |float=right| caption=AC5 Soft Shield.&lt;br /&gt;
| image=AC5_image.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
| image-width=200}}&lt;br /&gt;
The AC5 RF Soft Shield was designed to block the RF emissions from certain flashes (580EX II, 580EX and 430EX) from interfering with the FlexTT5, allowing the FlexTT5 to work at considerably longer range.  For proper performance the AC5 must be installed correctly. You can see how to properly install the AC5 Soft Shield [ here]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ian</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync&amp;diff=927</id>
		<title>HyperSync</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=HyperSync&amp;diff=927"/>
				<updated>2011-09-01T15:23:37Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ian: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{recommended reading|High Speed Sync|}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section only talks about HyperSync. Read the section on [[Understanding HyperSync and High Speed Sync]] to learn more about the difference between HyperSync and High Speed Sync.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
HyperSync enables a PocketWizard connected flash to begin firing just *before* the camera triggers a sync pulse. Since you are &amp;quot;triggering faster than a wire&amp;quot; with HyperSync, you can sync at shutter speeds faster than X-sync for many cameras and get more usable flash energy before Auto FP (High Speed Sync) is activated. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When using transmitting and receiving ControlTL radios, HyperSync is adjusted separately on the transmitter and receiver. The on-camera MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 automatically adjusts HyperSync for the best performance and compensates for changes to shutter speed. The receiving ControlTL radio can additionally compensate for flash power level by making adjustments to achieve the fastest possible sync speed with supported configurations, such as a FlexTT5 with an AC9 AlienBees adapter, a PowerST4, or a PowerMC2. Some configurations require adjustments via the PocketWizard Utility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All receiving PocketWizard radios, including the Plus II, etc., will trigger in sync with HyperSync.   HyperSync requires a MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 as a transmitter.  A Standard transmitter like a Plus II cannot trigger a remote FlexTT5 and achieve HyperSync.  This is because the MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 as transmitter actually sends out 2 signals every time it is triggered; one on a Standard Channel and one on a ControlTL channel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
HyperSync can be customized on a per-flash basis. If you have Multiple flashes of different makes/models, you can now make HyperSync adjustments individually on each receiving FlexTT5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Configuring HyperSync ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using a transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 on your camera, follow the instructions below for your specific receiving PocketWizard radio and then take pictures normally.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Remote FlexTT5 with Speedlite in the Top Shoe ===&lt;br /&gt;
With the default settings, you can sync at any shutter speed. HyperSync Automation will be sued only at 1/320th with Speedlites, after which the transmitting ControlTL radio will switch to using High Speed Sync isntead. On the transmittign radio, adjust the &amp;quot;HSS/FP Begins At (HyperSync Ends)&amp;quot; control under the HyperSync/HSS tab to specify the shutter speed at which HyperSync timings are no logner used and High Speed Sync/FP Sync is engaged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Transmitter-side Automated HyperSync will be used at all shutter speeds faster than x-sync until High Speed Sync is engaged. Receiver-side HyperSync automation is not currently supported for Canon Speedlites, as they do not communicate their power level through the hot shoe. For full HyperSync Automation with Speedlites, their power levels must be controlled via a Speedlite in Master Mode or AC3 ZoneController at camera position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== FlexTT5 - Flash Connected to P2 Port ===&lt;br /&gt;
• On the receiving FlexTT5, select the “P2 HyperSync Flash Duration” dropdown menu under the HyperSync/HSS Tab and choose a duration to match the estimated flash duration of your strobe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Attach the transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 to your camera. Connect the receiving FlexTT5 to the flash and take pictures normally.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== AC9 AlienBees Adapter ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• On the receiving FlexTT5, select the flash connected to the AC9 AlienBees Adapter in the HyperSync/HSS tab of the PocketWizard Utility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Attach the transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 to your camera. Connect the receiving FlexTT5 and AC9 AlienBees Adapter to the flash and take pictures normally.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As of this firmware release, HyperSync Automation is currently implemented for the following Paul C. Buff flashes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;text-align:center;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|AlienBees AB400&lt;br /&gt;
|White Lightning X800&lt;br /&gt;
|Zeus 1250&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|AlienBees AB800&lt;br /&gt;
|White Lightning X1600&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|AlienBees AB1600&lt;br /&gt;
|White Lightning X3200&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|AlienBees ABR800 RingFlash&lt;br /&gt;
|White Lightning Ultra1200&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your flash is connected to an AC9 AlienBees adapter and is not in the list above, try selecting a flash of a similar power level.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== PowerMC2 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No configuration is necessary. Attach the transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 to your camera. Connect the receiving PowerMC2 to the flash and take pictures normally.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== PowerST4 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• If the receiving PocketWizard radio is a PowerST4 connected to a Ranger RX series or Digital 1200RX/2400RX pack, choose the Elinchom flash head in use under the Misc Tab in the PocketWizard Utility. This control is set specifically on the receiving PowerST4. The Ranger S head will offer better HyperSync performance than the A head due to its longer flash duration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Attach the transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 to your camera. Connect the receiving PowerST4 to the flash and take pictures normally.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As of this firmware release, HyperSync Automation is currently implemented for the following Elinchrom flashes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;text-align:center;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=3 |Elinchrom Flashes&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Style 300RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Digital 1200RX or Digital 2400RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Digital S Head&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Ranger S Head&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Style 600RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Digital 1200RX or Digital 2400RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Digital SE Head&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Ranger A Head&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Style 1200RX&lt;br /&gt;
|Digital 1200RX or Digital 2400RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Mini A Head&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX Speed&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Ranger S Head&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|Digital 1200RX or Digital 2400RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Mini S Head&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX Speed&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Ranger A Head&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|Digital 1200RX or Digital 2400RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with A3000 Head&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX Speed A/s&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Ranger S Head&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|Digital 1200RX or Digital 2400RX&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with A6000 Head&lt;br /&gt;
|Ranger RX Speed A/s&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;with Ranger A Head&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your flash is connected to a PowerST4 and is not in the list above, set the remote ControlTL radio to receive on a Standard Channel and configure HyperSync using the HyperSync Transmitter Controls. Make sure to disable High Speed Sync from the transmitting radio.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== PocketWizard Radio Receiving on a Standard Channel ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
([[Plus II]], [[MultiMAX]], [[Misc_Tab#Basic_Trigger|FlexTT5 in Basic Trigger Mode]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the transmitting radio, adjust the HSS/FP Beings AT (HyperSync Ends) control under the [[HyperSync/HSS tab]] to specify the shutter speed at which HyperSync Timings are no longer used and High Speed Sync is engaged. Triggers on Standard Channels will only be sent at shutter speeds where High Speed Sync is disabled. Transmitter-side Automated HyperSync will be used at all shutter speed faster than x-sync until High Speed Sync is engaged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• For the transmitting ControlTL radio, select the “Flash Duration Selection” dropdown menu under the Sync Timing tab and choose a duration to match the estimated flash duration of your strobe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Attach the transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 to your camera. Connect the receiving PocketWizard radio to the flash and take pictures normally.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• See the P2 HyperSync Flash Duration section for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To use HyperSync at any shutter speed up to 1/8000th and never transition to High Speed Sync, check the “HyperSync Only (Disable HSS/FP)” box, also under the [[HyperSync/HSS Tab]].&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ian</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=PocketWizard_Wiki:Books/MiniTT1_and_FlexTT5_Manual&amp;diff=926</id>
		<title>PocketWizard Wiki:Books/MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 Manual</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=PocketWizard_Wiki:Books/MiniTT1_and_FlexTT5_Manual&amp;diff=926"/>
				<updated>2011-09-01T14:44:25Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ian: /* MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 Manual */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{saved_book}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 Manual ==&lt;br /&gt;
:[[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 Key Features]]&lt;br /&gt;
;First Steps&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Getting Started]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Batteries]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Safety Warnings]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Status LED]]&lt;br /&gt;
;Compatibility&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Canon Compatibility]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Nikon Compatibility]]&lt;br /&gt;
;Channels&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Channels]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Channels (CE/Europe)]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Learn Mode]]&lt;br /&gt;
;TTL&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Basic Wireless TTL]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Advanced Wireless TTL]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[High Speed Sync]]&lt;br /&gt;
;Manual Flash&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Manual Flash]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[HyperSync]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Understanding HyperSync and High Speed Sync]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[PowerTracking]]&lt;br /&gt;
;AC3 ZoneController&lt;br /&gt;
:[[AC3 ZoneController]]&lt;br /&gt;
;Utility&lt;br /&gt;
:[[PocketWizard Utility]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Factory Reset]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Update Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Channel Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Flash Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[HyperSync/HSS Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[PowerTracking Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Modeling Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Sleep Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Misc Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
;More Information&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Remote Camera Triggering]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Relay Mode]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[ControlTL Accessories]]&lt;br /&gt;
;Even More Information&lt;br /&gt;
:[[The FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Long Range Performance]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Beta Firmware]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Mounting]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Compliance]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Books|Books/MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 Manual]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ian</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=ControlTL_Accessories&amp;diff=925</id>
		<title>ControlTL Accessories</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=ControlTL_Accessories&amp;diff=925"/>
				<updated>2011-09-01T14:41:07Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ian: /* AC57 Power Adapter */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
===[[AC3 ZoneController]]===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===[[AC9 AlienBees Adapter]]===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===[[AC5 RF Soft Shield]]===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===[[AC7 RF Hard Shield]]===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[AC57 Power Adapter]] for AC7====&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ian</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=ControlTL_Accessories&amp;diff=924</id>
		<title>ControlTL Accessories</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=ControlTL_Accessories&amp;diff=924"/>
				<updated>2011-09-01T14:40:40Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ian: Created page with &amp;quot;__NOTOC__ ===AC3 ZoneController===    ===AC9 AlienBees Adapter===    ===AC5 RF Soft Shield===    ===AC7 RF Hard Shield===  ====AC57 Power Adapter====&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
===[[AC3 ZoneController]]===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===[[AC9 AlienBees Adapter]]===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===[[AC5 RF Soft Shield]]===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===[[AC7 RF Hard Shield]]===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[AC57 Power Adapter]]====&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ian</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=PocketWizard_Wiki:Books/MiniTT1_and_FlexTT5_Manual&amp;diff=923</id>
		<title>PocketWizard Wiki:Books/MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 Manual</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=PocketWizard_Wiki:Books/MiniTT1_and_FlexTT5_Manual&amp;diff=923"/>
				<updated>2011-09-01T14:06:35Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ian: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{saved_book}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 Manual ==&lt;br /&gt;
:[[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 Key Features]]&lt;br /&gt;
;First Steps&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Getting Started]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Batteries]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Safety Warnings]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Status LED]]&lt;br /&gt;
;Compatibility&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Canon Compatibility]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Nikon Compatibility]]&lt;br /&gt;
;Channels&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Channels]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Channels (CE/Europe)]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Learn Mode]]&lt;br /&gt;
;TTL&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Basic Wireless TTL]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Advanced Wireless TTL]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[High Speed Sync]]&lt;br /&gt;
;Manual Flash&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Manual Flash]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[HyperSync]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Understanding HyperSync and High Speed Sync]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[PowerTracking]]&lt;br /&gt;
;AC3 ZoneController&lt;br /&gt;
:[[AC3 ZoneController]]&lt;br /&gt;
;Utility&lt;br /&gt;
:[[PocketWizard Utility]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Factory Reset]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Update Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Channel Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Flash Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[HyperSync/HSS Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[PowerTracking Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Modeling Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Sleep Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Misc Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
;More Information&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Remote Camera Triggering]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Relay Mode]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[ControlTL Accessories]]&lt;br /&gt;
;Even More Information&lt;br /&gt;
:[[The FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Long Range Performance]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Mounting]]&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Compliance]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Books|Books/MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 Manual]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ian</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=MiniTT1_and_FlexTT5&amp;diff=922</id>
		<title>MiniTT1 and FlexTT5</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=MiniTT1_and_FlexTT5&amp;diff=922"/>
				<updated>2011-09-01T14:05:20Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ian: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:FlexTT5+MiniTT1.jpg|right|400px|PocketWizard Canon MiniTT1 and FlexTT5]]Congratulations on your purchase of the PocketWizard MiniTT1® / FlexTT5® Wireless Photo Control System for Canon or Nikon DSLR cameras and flashes.  You can use the MiniTT1 Transmitter and FlexTT5 Transceiver to control single or multiple off-camera electronic or intelligent TTL flashes.  The PocketWizard ControlTL® System takes the complex TTL data being sent through the camera’s hot shoe and digitally interprets and transmits it as a reliable radio signal. You can now place TTL or manual flashes anywhere to illuminate the scene: Around corners, out-of-sight and in bright sunlight.  The MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 are compatible with any PocketWizard radio for triggering manual flash or remote cameras. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Canon-specific MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 radios work within the Canon E-TTL II system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Nikon-specific MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 radios work within the Nikon i-TTL / CLS system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All references to TTL are exclusively for the electronic or intelligent TTL systems specific to Canon (E-TTL II) and Nikon (i-TTL / CLS), and not film TTL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The terms Speedlite or Speedlight are used interchangeably throughout this wiki.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This wiki contains the latest information about the operation of your radios.  If you would like to download a PDF of this information, [[PocketWizard_Wiki:Books/MiniTT1_and_FlexTT5_Manual|click here]] and follow the instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Operation ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{treasure map}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''To quickly begin using your radio, you might be interested in the Quick Guides or other documentation at [http://www.pocketwizard.com/support/manual PocketWizard.com].'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more detailed information, use the links below to hone in on the specific feature you are looking for.  The links are the section headings.  For example, the words '''Getting Started''' below will take you straight to that section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== [[Getting Started]] ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Information you should know before using your radios.  Also referred to as &amp;quot;READ ME FIRST&amp;quot; information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== [[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 Key Features|Key Features]]====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Learn more about the key features of your MiniTT1 and FlexTT5.  Additional information on features can also be found at [http://www.pocketwizard.com/products/transmitter_receiver/ PocketWizard.com]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== [[Safety Warnings]] ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Information about operating the radios safely can be found here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== [[Nikon Compatibility]] ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Find out exactly what cameras and flashes work with the Nikon-Specific ControlTL radios, and what specific operational considerations are required for your gear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== [[Canon Compatibility]] ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Find out exactly what cameras and flashes work with the Canon-specific ControlTL radios, and what specific operational considerations are required for your gear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== [[Batteries]] ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Battery types, polarity, and life expectancy information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== [[PocketWizard Utility]] ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Connect your radios to your computer via USB and control many aspects of them via the PocketWizard Utility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== [[Basic Wireless TTL]] ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Simple TTL operation instructions.  Use all of your Speedlites as one zone of light with the camera making the exposure decision.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== [[Advanced Wireless TTL]] ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Advanced i-TTL operation instructions.  Control individual zones of light.  Control your remote Speedlights manually from the camera position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== [[Manual Flash]] ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Trigger any remote flash simply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== [[PowerTracking]] ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Trigger a compatible remote studio flash and control its power level directly from the camera position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== [[HyperSync]] ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Learn more about increasing your X-Sync speed using HyperSync.  See [[Understanding HyperSync and High Speed Sync]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== [[High Speed Sync]] / Auto FP ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use your Speedlites with your camera's fastest shutter speeds.  See [[Understanding HyperSync and High Speed Sync]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== [[Channels]] ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Channels allow you to work collaboratively with other photographers, or to work with your radios exclusively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== [[Learn Mode]]  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Learn Mode is not required for normal operation of your radios, but if you are working away from the PocketWizard Utility and in conflict with another photographer on your channel, Learn Mode allows you to change channels in the field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== [[Remote Camera Triggering]] ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition to triggering remote flash, your PocketWizard radios can trigger a remote camera's motor drive port.  Relay Mode is covered in this section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== [[Factory Reset]] ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes you just need the settings in your radio to be like they were when you first took them out of the box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== [[Status LED]] ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section covers the various colors and blink patterns used by the Status LED.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== [[Mounting]] ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Radios perform best when mounted properly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== [[Long Range Performance]] ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Optimize range using these techniques.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== [[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 Specifications]] ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Details on radio specifics are found here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== [[FCC Notice]] ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The FCC wants you to know...&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ian</name></author>	</entry>

	</feed>